人教中考英语九年级英语总复习

人教中考英语九年级英语总复习

‎2019 年人教版中考英语九年级英语 总复习教案 ‎1‎ 课时授课计划 授课日期 年 月 日 星期 ‎ 课 题 （第 课时） 初中英语总复习计划 课时教学 目标 ‎考试性质、《考试标准》分析、试题分析、复习安排 重点和难 点 ‎制定自己配合老师复习的学习计划 教学媒体 A tape recorder , CAI 时 间 一、考试性质 ‎教 师 活 动 设 计 学生活动 初中毕业英语学业考试是以《英语课程标准》五级目标 为依据，义务教育阶段英语学科的终结性考试。考试结 果既是衡量学生是否达到初中毕业标准的主要依据，也 是高中招生的重要依据之一。‎ 依据《英语课程标准》来确定考查内容和标准。注重落 实知识与能力、 过程与方法、 情感态度与价值观的三维目标， 重视考查学生对英语基础知识与基本技能的掌握情况，考查 学生在具体情境中综合运用语言的能力。 二、《考试标准》分析 ‎《英语课程标准》规定的义务教育阶段英语课程的总体 目标是发展学生的语言综合运用能力，这一能力是建立在语 言知识、语言技能、情感态度、学习策略和文化意识等五个 方面的基础之上的。在这五个方面中，情感态度、学习策略 等课程目标难以直接通过笔试的方式进行考查，因此，英语 学业考试主要侧重考查学生的语言技能、语言知识、跨文化 交际意识和跨文化交际能力。有以下考试内容与要求：‎ ‎（一）语言知识 要求考生能够恰当运用基本的语音、语法知识，学会使 用 1600 个单词和 300 个习惯用语或固定搭配。 本部分侧重考查学生在一定的语境中灵活运用语音知 识、语法知识、词汇知识等语言知识的能力。‎ ‎2‎ ‎（二）语言技能 ‎1、听力技能 要求考生能听懂有关日常生活所熟悉的话题。 考生应能 够：‎ 理解主旨要义； 获取事实性的具体信息； 推测说话人的身份、意图和观点； 在听的过程中作出恰当反应； 针对所听语段的内容记录关键信息 本部分侧重考查学生对口头语言材料的理解能力以 及从中获取信息的能力。‎ ‎2、阅读技能 要求考生读懂各种题材和体裁的简短书面材料。考生应 能：‎ 理解主旨要义； 理解材料中的具体信息； 根据上下文和构词法推断生词的含义； 推测作者的身份、意图和观点； 预测故事情节的发展和可能的结局；‎ 阅读技能是初中毕业考试英语学科的主要考查内容之 一，着重考查考生理解各种书面材料的能力以及从中获取信 息的能力。本部分不考查语言知识，但将适当选用一些实用 性的语言材料，如广告、告示、说明书、指令、图表、故事 和短文作为阅读素材。‎ ‎3、写作技能 要求学生根据提示，使用所学语法和词汇等基础知识，‎ 以书面的形式清楚、连贯地表达自己的意思。学生应能：‎ A、 具有基本的英、汉句子翻译能力；‎ B、 根据提示图示或表格写出简单的文章或操作说明；‎ C、 从文章中获取主要信息并能摘录要点；‎ D、 写简单的应用文，如书信、电子邮件、告示、海报 ‎3‎ 等；‎ E、 根据上下文猜测说话人的意图，完成对话。 本部分侧重考查学生运用所学知识， 以书面的形式进行 信息沟通，再现生活经历，描述周围事物，表达意见和观点 的能力，将尽可能考查学生表达真实意义或个人经验的能力。 三、试题描述 ‎1、听力技能（计 20 分，主观题 10 分，客观题 10 分） A）理解 根据你所听到的对话，选择正确的答案。 听下面五段对话，选出与所听内容相符的图片； 听下面一段对话，做第 6、7 小题； 听下面一段对话，做第 8、9、10 小题； 本题型属于客观性试题， 主要测试学生对功能意念项目 和话题项目的掌握情况，重点考查学生理解所只内容的主旨 要义和具体信息的能力，考查学生推断说话人的身份、意图 和观点等的能力。‎ B）反应 根据你听到的内容和实际情况，写出尽可能 简要的答语；‎ 本题属于主观性试题， 测试学生对功能意念项目和话题 项目的掌握情况，重点考查学生针对所听内容并结合自己的 实际情况进行应答的能力。‎ C）笔录要点 根据你听到的内容，填写下面的表格。 以能力立意，属于主观性试题。测试学生对话题项目的 掌握情况，重点考查学生对所听内容进行归纳并笔录要点的 能力。‎ ‎2、知识运用（计 25 分）‎ A） 单项填空 从 A、B、C、 D 四个选项中选择正确 的答案填空；‎ 以知识立意，属于客观性试题，测试学生对语法项目的 掌握情况，重点考查学生在一定语境下正确运用语法、常用 相似词语以及功能意念项目的能力。‎ B）完形填空 以能力兼知识立意， 属于客观性试题， 重 ‎4‎ 点考查学生的阅读理解能力，同时测试学生通过上下文灵活 运用语法知识的能力。‎ ‎3、阅读技能。（计 30 分）‎ A）阅读短文，判断下列句子是否符合短文内容。符合 的写 T，不符合的写 F。‎ B）阅读短文，从每题 A、B、C、D 四个选项中，选出 最佳回答问题或完成句子；‎ C）阅读下列图表，从每题所给的 A、B、 C、D 四个选 项中，选出最佳选项回答问题或完成句子。‎ D）阅读下列材料，从所给的 A—E 五个选项中，选出 正确的选项填空，使短文通顺、内容完整。‎ 以上题型都是以能力立意，属于客观性试题。主要测试 学生理解各种题材和体裁的文章以及其他载体信息的能力。‎ ‎4、写作技能（计 25 分）‎ A）摘录要点 阅读短文，然后完成内容摘要 以能力立意，属于主观性试题，重点测试学生从文章中 获取主要信息并加以摘录的能力。‎ B）翻译 阅读下面的句子，按要求完成其翻译 以能力立意，属于主观性试题，主要测试学生对两种语 言表达习惯异同的理解和掌握情况，考查汉英互译的能力和 表达能力。‎ ‎5、附加部分（两部分，计 20 分）‎ A）完成对话 通读下面的对话，然后根据上下文补全 对话。‎ 属于主观性试题，测试学生对功能意念项目、话题项目 的掌握情况，重点考查学生提出问题、请求帮助等方面的能 力，考查学生积极、主动与人交流的能力。‎ B）情景作文 以能力立意，属于主观性试题，本题型提供情景的形式 尽可能多样化，重点在于测试学生各种文体的简单的写作技 能。‎ ‎5‎ 四、复习安排 针对今年考试标准，将对学生进行针对性的复习。全期 基础复习阶段时间约为 80 课时。综合复习阶段 40 课时。‎ 第一阶段：分两部分同时进行 一部分：粗讲初中英语七、八、九年级的教材，以教材 上的单词、句型、惯用法、对话、日常用语、课文为重点， 重点督促学生熟悉教材，反复抽查，要求掌握好考标上要求 的单词、句型，背诵日常用语，重点对话和重点课文；本阶 段在讲解的同时主要以背、默为主 二部分：分知识点阶段复习，针对考试命题的要求，以 考试标准上的要求为向导，进行知识点的讲解，语法知识的 系统复习、巩固、练习、测试。‎ 听力技能： 5 课时 基础知识： 10 课时 阅读技能： 12 课时 写作技能：‎ ‎12 课时 附加题： 12 课时 综合运用：6‎ 课时 第二阶段：全面复习、巩固、提高阶段 在市模拟考试后， 进行全面的综合复习， 针对今年中考的 试卷要求，依据《英语课程标准》和《考标》要求对学生 进行综合试卷的考试，查漏补缺，解决学生的遗留问题。 进行中考模拟题型练习、 检测， 使学生有针对性的进行提 高。‎ 综合复习： 40 课时 三、制定自己的英语学习详细计划。‎ 教 后 录 ‎6‎ 课时授课计划 授课日期 年 月 日 星期 ‎ 课 题 （第 课时） 七年级上册 Unit1-6‎ 一、基础知识巩固 课时教学 目标 ‎二、基础练习巩固 重点和难 点 ‎中考链接 教学媒体 A tape recorder , CAI 时 间 一 基础知识巩固 词组 ‎教 师 活 动 设 计 学生活动 ‎1.用英语读 read in English 2.拼写你的名字 spell your name 3.用 号码给某人打电话 call sb at ‎4. 一串钥匙 a set of keys ‎5.你的全家福（ 2 种） a photo of your family/your family photo 6．为 而感谢你 thank you for doing sth.‎ 7. 问问题 ask questions 8. 回答问题 answer the questions ‎9.玩电脑游戏 play computer games ‎10.做运动 play sports ‎11.看电视 watch TV ‎12.打排球 play volleyball 13.有大量的体育收集品 have a great sports colletion ‎14. 许多 a lot of/lots of ‎15.去野餐 go on a picnic 16.在失物招领处 in the lost and found case 17.一张身份证 an ID card 重要句型：‎ ‎1．What ’s this in English ? 这个用英语怎么说？ 回答 : orange .‎ 问 What ‘s this 或 What ‘s that 时，英语中一律用 it is 来回答。拓展：‎ What‘re those in English ?‎ ‎ chairs.‎ 2. What color is it ? 它是什么颜色的？‎ ‎1）color 颜色 造句：‎ ‎2）color sth. + 颜色 把 涂成 颜色 造句 :‎ ‎3) be colorful 五彩斑斓的 造句 :‎ 2. Is this your watch ? Call Alan at 4953539.‎ ‎7‎ A. 对划线句子进行回答： Yes, . Is that your bother ? No, .‎ this 反义词 :‎ 复数 : ‎ That is my brother. 变复数 . this is 这是 也可用于介绍他人 造句 :‎ call sb. at 拨打 联系某人 拓展 : 总结打电话的词组 :‎ ‎1)‎ ‎2)‎ ‎3)‎ ‎4)‎ call on sb./ call at sp. 拜访某人 造句 :‎ called = named 名为 造句：‎ ‎4．Thanks for the photo of your family .‎ 划线部分改写 Thank ‎ Thanks for sth. / doing sth. 为 而感谢你 造句：‎ 填空： Thanks for . ( 邀请我们 )‎ ‎5． Here is my family photo ! 这是我的全家福 be 的单复数取决于后面的名词。‎ 选择 : Here my best wishes to you .‎ A. is B. are 6. Please take these things to your sister. 请把这些东西带给你的妹 妹。 Can you bring some things to school ? 你能带些东西来学校吗？ 辨析 : take to 带 /送 去某地 造句：‎ bring to 拿来，送来 造句：‎ 请用 take 或 bring 填空：‎ ‎1）My father is going to me to Beijing next week .‎ 2) I want to buy a tennis racket, but I forget to money with me .‎ 3) Please don‘t it here, it smells too bad.‎ 4) She doesn‘t the thing there, she just put it at home .‎ 7. Let’s watch TV. 让我们看电视吧！‎ A. 反义疑问句： Let‘s watch TV, ?‎ 划线部分改写： 1） watch TV ?‎ 2) ‎ watch TV ?‎ 3) ‎ Watching TV ? let sb. do sth. 让某人做某事 造句：‎ B: 易混词组辨析：‎ watch 观看 造句：‎ ‎8‎ watch sb do/ doing sth. 观看某人做 /正在做某事 造句：‎ look at 看 不一定看见 造句：‎ see 看见 看到 过去时 /过去分词 ‎ 造句：‎ see sb do/doing sth. 看到某人做 /正在做某事 造句：‎ ‎8．That sounds good. 听起来不错。‎ sound + 形容词 听起来 造句：‎ sound like + 名词 听起来像 造句：‎ 总结其他感官动词：‎ ‎9．Let ’s play sports! 让我们锻炼吧！ 划线部分还可以改写成：‎ ‎10. Runner eats well . 跑步者吃得好 good 修饰形容词 well 表示身体好或修饰动词 /副词 请用 good 或 well 填空：‎ ‎1）He is at sports, he plays basketabll very .‎ 2) After the meat is cooked, you can eat it .‎ 3) The clothes feel pretty .‎ 4) She is feeling very now .‎ 5) He is a man, and gets on with others.‎ 6) The product sells , so I think the quality of it is rather ‎ ‎11． 人称代词和物主代词：‎ ‎1）人称代词： 主格：I , you , he, she, it 复数： , , . 用法：句首作主语 宾格 : me, you , him , her, it 复数： , , .‎ 用法：句中动词或介词后作定语 填空 :‎ ‎2) 物主代词 :‎ 形容词性： my, your, his , her , its 复数 : , , ‎ 用法 : 名词前作定语 名词性： mine, yours, his , hers, its 复数 : , , ‎ 用法 : 句首作主语，句中动词后作宾语或系动词后作表语 填空 :‎ ‎ is a singer, song is very good. (her)‎ We don‘t know . Can you tell us some stories ? (he) That‘s too hard for . (our)‎ ‎ answers are the same as ours. (theirs) Where‘s keys ? are on the bed. (she) Her CD is better than . (me)‎ We both have kites, but are better. (he)‎ ‎9‎ Did you win ? Yes, our team beat . (they) 12. 名词复数的不规则变化形式。‎ box- , watch- , story- , lady- , knife- , leaf- ,‎ photo- , photatoes- , child- , foot- ,‎ tooth- , mouse- , a piece of paper - ,‎ a man doctor- , a woman pilot- ,‎ deer- , Chinese- ‎ ‎（二）基础知识练习 1. His telephone number is 6752219.( 对画线部分提问 )‎ ‎ telephone number.‎ 2. I can spell it. N-E-W.‎ ‎ you spell it ?‎ ‎3. --- 用英语表达这是什么？ --- 它是一只桔子。‎ ‎--What this English? --- It orange. 4.--非常感谢你。 ---不用谢。‎ ‎---Thank you .=Thank you .‎ ‎---You are .=That ‘s .=That ‘s . 5.他的姓是什么？他的姓是布朗 .‎ ‎－ What‘s his name?=What‘s his name?‎ ‎— is Brown. 6.你能告诉我她的名是什么？‎ Could you tell me What name ? 7.用 take 或 bring 填空 Please me some books.‎ Please these books to your mother. 8.打扰了！那是一本书吗？‎ ‎ ! a book?‎ 9. Is this her clock? （作肯定回答）‎ Yes, .‎ 10. Is that a telephone?(作否定回答 ) No, .‎ 11. This is a dictionary.( 改为复数 )‎ ‎ .‎ 12. Are those erasers?(肯定回答 )‎ ‎ .‎ ‎13.她的钥匙在哪？他们在梳妆台上。‎ ‎ keys? They the dresser.‎ ‎14.Mary ‘s bag is under the bed. (对画线部分提问 )‎ ‎ Mary ‘s bag?‎ ‎15. 书桌在书橱和床之间。‎ The desk is the book case the bed .‎ ‎10‎ ‎16.He has a tennis racket.(改为一般疑问句，并作否定回答 )‎ ‎ he a tennis racket? No, . 17.--我没有足球，让我们打网球吧。 ----那听起来真好。‎ ‎----I a soccer ball. tennis.‎ ‎----That . 18.我爸爸每天在电视上看新闻。‎ My father news TV . 19.汤姆不喜欢吃沙拉做晚餐！‎ Tom salad dinner. 20.用括号内所给单词的适当形式完成句子 ‎(1).We like (strawberry)for brekfast.I don ‘t like (broccoli)‎ for supper.‎ ‎(2).Here (be) my family photos. (3).Victor (have)five ping-pong bats.‎ (4) Dale and Bob are my good friends.I like (they)‎ (5) ‎--Do you know Liu Xiang?---Yes,he is a (run) star. (6)It ‘s good for you to eat some (tomato)‎ ‎(7)Three and two (be) five. 21.选词填空 am , is , are , do , does , don ‘ t , doesn ‘ t , his , her , my , your , he , she ‎（ 1） I have a brother . name is Bob .‎ （ ‎2）Miss Sun is our English teacher . favourite food is ice cream .‎ （ ‎3） What this in English ?‎ （ ‎4） your parents like noodles ?‎ （ ‎5） My friend like bananas .‎ 中考链接 1. Tom‘s card is much more beautiful than . A .our B. her C.mine D.me 2. Everyone can have ID card ,even a newly-born baby.‎ A. a B.an C.the D./ 3.It isn ‘t watch.I left mine at home.‎ A.my B.me C.I D.myself 4.Kate has lost key. asked for help.‎ A.her ;He ;I B.his;He;me C.his;She;I D.her;She;me 5. Mike is Englishman.He studies in university in Changsha.‎ A. the ;a B. a;a C.an;a D.an ,the 6. We traveled all night to London and got there Sunday morning.‎ A. for B.on C.at D.to ‎7.—Who will be duty tomorrow?---Susan will.‎ A at B.on C.for D.in 8. Tom is good at playing , but he can ‘t play well .‎ A. soccer, the drums B. the basketballl, violin C. tennis, trumpet 9. No news good news.‎ A. is B. are C. be 10. The bigger basketball is and the smaller one is .‎ ‎11‎ A. Ben ‘s, my B. Ben ‘s, mine C. Ben, I ‘s 9. It‘s about train ride from Beijing to Jinan.‎ A. 4 hours B. 4-hour C. 4 hours‘‎ 10. This is bedroom.‎ A. Tina ‘s parents B. Tom‘s parents‘ C. Bob ‘s parents‘s 11. Where are you going ? I ‘m going to .‎ A. the doctors ‘ B. Uncle Liu C. Mrs Brown ‘s ‎14.(1)I have two (knife).Which one do you want? (2).Are they any (sheep) on the farm?‎ ‎(3).This is (Jim and David) picture. (4).These are (Lily and Lucy) rooms.‎ ‎(5).My daughter (go) to school from Monday to Friday.‎ ‎22. 写一段话，谈谈你喜欢什么东西，有什么收藏。 80 字左右。‎ 教 后 录 ‎12‎ 课时授课计划 授课日期 年 月 日 星期 ‎ 课 题 （第 课时） 七年级上 unit 7 9‎ 课时教学 目标 ‎三、 基础知识巩固 四、 基础练习巩固 重点和难 点 ‎中考链接 教学媒体 A tape recorder , CAI 时 间 一 基础知识巩固 词组：‎ ‎教 师 活 动 设 计 学生活动 1. 物美价廉 at a good price 2. 想要 (某人 )做某事 want (sb) to do sth.‎ 3. 给你 Here you are !‎ 4. 从 买 buy . from .‎ 5. 卖给 sell to 6. 看一看 have a look (at)‎ 7. 大减价 be on sale = have a sale 8. 付得起的价格 afford the prices /afford to do 9. 去看电影 go to a movie / go to see 10. 了解 learn about 11. 举行艺术节 have an Art Festival 12. 说英语 speak English 13. 需要帮助 need help 14. 展示给某人某事 show sb. sth/ show sth to sb 15. 帮某人某事 help sb.with sth. (help kids with swimming)‎ 重点句型 1. How much is this T-shirt? -It ’s seven dollars. 这件 T 恤衫多少钱？－ 7 美元。 划线部分同义句改写：‎ What‘s ? How much ? how much 可以提问价格：‎ 这双鞋多少钱 How much ?‎ 这些裤子多少钱 How much ?‎ 注意：句中 be 的单复数由主语决定 how much 可以提问不可数名词，表示多少 杯子里要多少咖啡？ How much is there ? how many 提问可数名词，表多少，常用复数 桌子上有几个杯子 How many ?‎ 注意： be 动词的变化 2. Can I help you? I ’ll take it 您想买点什么？ (我能帮你吗？ ) 我买 ‎13‎ 了。‎ ‎= can I do you?‎ ‎= I can do you?‎ 一 基础练习巩固 ‎1 I want to buy .。我想买一条长裤。‎ I ‘ll it/them. 我要买它（们） 。 the money.给钱。‎ ‎2. 200 yuan.‎ ‎= 200 yuan. 我们每人有 200 元。‎ ‎5.The price of the watches .手表的价格是低的 /高的。 The watch is cheap/expensive=dear.手表是便宜 /昂贵的。‎ ‎6.We English ‎.我们必须学好英语。‎ ‎7.We pants only 30 yuan you 我们的长裤 30 元卖给你。‎ We .我们有许多种颜色的衬衫。‎ ‎8.Can I ？我可以试一试吗？‎ Can I ?我可以试穿它（们）吗？ 9.-When is your birthday? 你的生日在什么时候？‎ ‎-My birthday is ..我的生日在十月十日。 10.The is January.‎ 一月是一年的第一个月。‎ ‎11. How old are you?= ?你几岁？‎ ‎16. today?‎ ‎=‎ ‎17. When you born? =‎ today? 今天是几月几日？。‎ you born?你是哪一 年出生的？‎ I was born ‎1995. 我是 95 年出生。‎ ‎18. 1949 年读 nineteen forty-nine 2004:two thousand and four 1804:eighteen (o) four 1600:sixteen hundred 15 you want to ?Yes,I .‎ 你想去看电影吗？是。‎ 16 he want to ?. No,he .‎ 他想去旅行吗？不，他不想。‎ 17. do you like? 你喜欢哪种电影？‎ 18. do you them?‎ ‎= do you them?你觉得它们怎样？‎ ‎19.I think they ‘re . 我认为他们是令人兴奋的。‎ I think they ‘re .我认为他们是不吓人的。 20.Do you think they ‘re interesting? 你觉得它们有趣吗？‎ Yes, ./ 是，我认为是这样的 No,I 。 /不，我认为不是如此。‎ ‎21. is Paul Jackson=I Paul Jackson .=Paul Jackson is . 我最喜欢的演员是 Paul Jackson。‎ ‎22.I comedies. 我对喜剧感兴趣。‎ 23. She often to see a movie on weekends.= She often goes to see a movie on weekends with her friends.= She often to see a movie on weekends. 在周末她经常和她的朋友去看 ‎14‎ 电影。‎ ‎24 (Jack) birthday is in November. 25.September is the (nine) month of a year. 26.Which is the (twelve) month of a year?‎ This is his (twelve) birthday.‎ 27. The two _(comedy) are very interesting.‎ 28. She _ (want)_ (see) the movie.‎ ‎29.I _ _ (like) (watch) TV.‎ 30. My father often (watch) TV in the evening.‎ 三、中考链接 ‎1、 of the teachers in out school are women teachers.‎ A. Three quarter B. Two thirds C. Second threes D.three four 2.There are CDs and DVDs in the big video shop.‎ A. hundred B. hundreds C.hundreds of D.hundred of 3.Theree are people in my family. We live on the floor in a tall building.‎ A.five,six B.fifth, sixth C.fifth, six D.five,sixth 4.Don ‘t worry.We have hours left before beginning the class.‎ A. one and a half B. one hour and half C. one hour and a half D. one and half 5. ‎--when will Mr. Black come to Beijing?‎ th ‎-- September 5 . A.on B.to C. at D.in 6. His aunt went to America May,1960.‎ A. from B. in C. on D. at 7. The engineer will return from Macao a few days.‎ A. since B. in C. on D. after 8. Another way of saying eleven forty is .‎ A. twenty to twenty B.twenty to twelve C. twenty to eleven D. eleven past forty 9. The boy has stamps. A. two hundreds and fifty-five B. two hundred and fifty-five C. two hundred and fifty-five ‎10 The girl red is my sister. A .in B. on C of D. over.‎ 教 后 录 ‎15‎ 课时授课计划 授课日期 年 月 日 星期 ‎ 课 题 （第 课时） 七年级上 unit 10-12‎ 基础知识巩固 课时教学 目标 ‎基础练习巩固 重点和难 点 ‎中考链接 教学媒体 A tape recorder , CAI 教 师 活 动 一 基础知识巩固：‎ 设 计 ‎1. 想要做某事 2. 下国际象棋 3. 和 相处得好 ‎4. 弹吉它 ‎5. 帮助孩子们游泳 6. 参加校音乐节 ‎7. 起床 ‎8. 吃早饭 时 学生活动 间 ‎9. 到达 10. 洗淋浴 11. 乘坐 到某地 12. 整个晚上 ‎13. 回家，到家 14. 做作业 15. 写信给某人 ‎16. 他最喜欢的科目 17. 对某人严格 ‎18. 在周四上午 19. 上体育 /艺术 /数学课 20. 和 玩 二．重点句式 :‎ 1. She can play computer games. 一般疑问句，否定回答 ‎ play computer games? No, she .‎ 2. I can sing a song on the school music festival.‎ ‎ you on the school music festival?‎ 3. My sister wants to join the swimming club.‎ ‎ your sister ?‎ 4. Lucy ‘s brother wants to be an actor. 一般疑问句 ‎ Lucy ‘s brother to be an actor? Yes, .‎ 5. She runs at 6:00 every morning. 划线提问 ‎ she every morning?‎ 6. It‘s nine o‘clock. the ?= is it?‎ 7. He often has lunch at school.‎ ‎ he often lunch 8. He goes to bed at 9:50 p.m.‎ ‎ he at 9:50‎ 9. He does his homework at home 否定句 He his homework at home 10. 你通常几点钟起床？五点。‎ ‎ do you usually get up?‎ I usually five 11. I have biology on Tuesday and Friday.‎ ‎ you have on Tuesday and Friday?‎ 12. His favorite subject is biology.‎ ‎ his favorite subject?‎ 13. We have Chinese from Monday to Friday.‎ ‎ you Chinese?‎ ‎16‎ 11. Linda likes to play with her little sister.‎ ‎ Linda to play ?‎ 12. They have history on Monday afternoon.‎ ‎ they on Monday afternoon?‎ 三．中考链接：‎ 1. Bob can play tennis but can ‘t play violin. A the, the B /, / C the, / D /, the 2. ‎–Can you play volleyball? -- Sorry, I .‎ A don ‘t B do C can‘t D can 3. Please come and join ! You can be in club! A us, us B us, our C our, us D our, our 4. Can you help me my homework A with B of C learning D about 5. Miss Read is good music. She is good children in the music club.‎ A at, at B with, with C at, with D with, at 6. Little Tom can draw . His drawings are very . A good, well B well, good C good, good D well, well 7. It‘s time Class. A to B for C with D of 8. What time the child his homework?‎ A does, does B does, do C do, does D do, do 9. ‎ weekends we go to school 7 o ‘clock. A In, at B On, at C On, in D In, on 10. We often go to park Sunday afternoon. A on B in C at D to 11. Maria to school early every morning. A go,in B goes, in C goes, / D goes, in the 12. How many are there in your school?‎ A woman teachers B women teacher C women teachers D woman teacher 13. There a teacher and some students in the classroom.A is B are C have D am 14. Miss Gao is very strict her students their studies A in, in B with, with C in, with D with, in 15. ‎–Let‘s play tennis after school.‎ ‎–That great!‎ A sounds B sound C hears D looks 教 后 录 ‎17‎ 课时授课计划 授课日期 年 月 日 星期 ‎ 课 题 （第 课时） 七下 Unit 1-2‎ 课时教学 目标 ‎基础知识巩固 基础练习巩固 重点和难 点 ‎中考链接 教学媒体 A tape recorder , CAI 时 间 一、基础知识巩固 I. 重点词组 :‎ ‎教 师 活 动 设 计 学生活动 1. be from = come from 来自于 2. speak a little French 说一点法语 3. take/have a walk= go for a walk 散步 4. go through 步行穿过 go straight 一直走 5. go down /along/up 沿着 向前走走 6. turn left/right at the first turning/crossing ：在第一个路口向左 /右转 7. be next to=be close to 在隔壁，旁边 8. be across from= be opposite to ：在 对面 ‎9. between... and.... ：在 和 之间 10. in front of 在 前面 11. near here=in the neighborhood：在附近 II. 重点句型 1. Where does your pen pal come from ? 你的笔友来自哪里？‎ My pen pal comes from France.‎ 划线部分同义句： Where ? My pen pal .‎ 拓展：划线部分提问 The girl from Canada studies in China now .‎ ‎ gril in China now ?‎ 2. What language does he speak ? 他说什么语言？‎ He speaks Japanese日. 语。 思考并完成表格：‎ 国家 语言 人/复数 E.G. England English Englishman/Englishmen China Japan France ‎18‎ Canada 1. I can speak a little French . 我能说一点法语。‎ 易混淆词组：‎ a litlle 一点儿 （修饰不可数名词）否定： 造句：‎ a few 一点儿 （修饰可数名词）否定： 造句：‎ 2. Is there a big supermarket near here? 这附近有超市吗？ 与 Could you tell me ? 合为一句并用同义词组替换 Could you tell me a big supermarket ‎ ‎ ?‎ 同义句：‎ ‎① Could you tell me ?‎ ‎② Could you tell me ?‎ ‎③ Could you tell me ?‎ ‎④ Could you tell me ?‎ ‎⑤ Could you tell me ?‎ 3. There are some pay phones in the neighborhood .附近有许多付费电话 划线部分提问： in the neighborhood ?‎ 变为否定句： There pay phones . 反义疑问句： There are some , ? 句型 There be + 某事 /某人 + 某地 / 某时 表示“有” 一般将来时 There will be 或 There is/are going to be 造句：‎ ‎＊ There be 句型遵循就近原则 选择： There some bread and turkey slices on the table.‎ A. is B. are 4. Bridge Street is a good place to have fun. 娱乐的好地方 A. 划线部分的同义词组：① ② ‎ A. have fun doing sth. 在做某事的过程中有乐趣 造句：‎ 拓展 ; have trouble/problems doing sth 做某事有困难 造句：‎ C.句型： a place/time/person to do sth 一个做某事的 地方 /时间 /人 造句：‎ 5. across 与 through 穿过 go across 指从表面上 = ‎ 造句：‎ go through 指从空间内 造句：‎ 选择： At last , they trekked the desert successfully . A. across B. through C. over II. 练习 词汇 1. China lies between two / ?k Λ tr?/z ‎19‎ 1. He /t ?:nz/ left onto Main Street.‎ 2. ‎ /'welk ?m/ back to school , class !‎ 3. I sat / b?'twi:n/ the two students.‎ 4. She /h?ups/ to catch a taxi soon .‎ 翻译 ‎1.Some students think Fifth Avenue is a wonderful place ‎ ‎ . ( 散步 )‎ ‎2. 他的加拿大笔友现在住在中国。 His pen pal Canada ‎ ‎ China now .‎ ‎3. 沿着路直走，你就会发现邮局就在车站的对面。 ‎ the road, and you can find the post office is the bus stop . 4. 步行穿过公园就是花园之旅的开始。 the park is the ‎ the garden tour .‎ 词形 be, take , mean , difference , himself A supermarket is from other stores in several ways. There ‎ a lot of goods in a supermarket. The customers can things by themselves and take them to the check-out counter. This ‎ supermarkets need fewer workers.‎ 中考链接 1. The students usually have a lot of fun their teachers a sxhool trip . A. with, taking B. with, to take C. for, take D. of , taking 2. There a concert tomorrow. A. is going to be B. is going to have C. is going D. will have 3. Excuse me, please tell me . There is a shop over there. You can get some there. A. how I can find a supermarket B. where the supermarket is C. where I can buy some fruit 4. Do you often write your pen friend ? Yes, once a month. A.with B. for C. to 5. Before 2003, there was no direct airline mainland. A. along B. in C. between D. at ‎Taiwan and the 教 后 录 ‎20‎ 课时授课计划 授课日期 年 月 日 星期 ‎ 课 题 （第 课时） Unit3-4‎ 基础知识巩固 课时教学 目标 ‎基础练习巩固 重点和难 点 ‎中考链接 教学媒体 A tape recorder , CAI 时 间 I. 重点词组 :‎ ‎教 师 活 动 设 计 学生活动 1. kind of=a bit =a little 有几分 ,有点儿 2. be friendly to sb ：对某人友好 be friendly with sb ：和某人友好相处 3. like doing sth ：喜欢做某事（习惯性的）‎ ‎4. like to do sth ：喜欢做某事（偶尔一次的、未发生的）‎ 5. play with 和 玩 6. work with 和 一起工作 7. work for 为 工作 ‎8. work hard/late 努力工作 (学习 ) /工作到很晚 9. get from 从 得到 10. give sb sth=give sth to sb 把某物给某人 11. talk to/with 和 谈话 12. work in a hospital 在医院工作 II. 重点句型 1. Why do you like koalas ? 你为什么喜欢树袋熊？ Because they ‘kinrde of cute . 因为他们有点可爱。 划线部分 = .‎ 造句：‎ 注意： kind 还有指“种类” 词组：‎ 造句（特殊疑问句） ：‎ 选择： The coat looks a little old . A. a bit of B. a kind of C. kind of How much this kind of socks? A. is B. are C. does 2. He usually sleeps and relaxes ① 20 hours ② every day 划线提问① he usually sleep and relax every day ?‎ ‎② he sleep and relax 20 hours ?‎ 3. What does he do ?他是干什么的？ He is a nurse . 他是名护士。‎ 划线部分 = his job ? = he ?‎ ‎4.I wear a white uniform and I help doctors 我穿白色制服 ,协助医生工 作 A. 划线部分 = ‎ wear 的过去式和过去分词 ‎ 易混淆词组：‎ ‎21‎ ‎1) wear 穿着，表状态 造句：‎ ‎2）be in 穿着 颜色的衣服 造句：‎ ‎3）put on 穿 表动作 反义词组 ‎ 造句：‎ ‎4）dress sb./dress oneself 给 穿衣 造句：‎ dress up 装扮 造句：‎ B. a uniform /ju:/‎ 用“ a”或“ an”填空 ： university, unbrella , usual thing , unusual person , ugly fish 5. People give me their money or get their money from me. 人们把他们 的钱给我或是从我这儿得到钱。‎ 划线部分变被动： Their money people get from 从 得到 造句：‎ 6. 单数变复数： leave thief ‎ 7. Sometimes I work in the day and sometimes at night.‎ 划线部分可替换成： ‎ 易混淆词组：‎ ‎1）sometimes 有时 He arrives late for school sometimes .‎ ‎ does he arrive ?‎ 2) sometime 某时，指时间点 造句：‎ 3) some times 几次，几倍 I ‘v seen the film some times .‎ ‎ have you seen ?‎ 4) some time 一段时间 造句：‎ II. 练习 词汇 ‎me by 1. What do you usually do / 'dur??/ your summer holidays ?‎ 2. His sister works as a / nз :/sin a hospital .‎ 3. He ususally / r?'l?ks?z/ 20 hours every day .‎ 4. She /w :/(wore) a scarf yesterday.‎ 5. There are many /li:vz/ on the ground.‎ 6. Our teacher often asks us to read newspapers and ‎ ‎/ ?m?g ?'zi:nz/ after class.‎ 选择 1. The coat looks old. A. a bit of B. kind of C. a kind of D. a little of 2. What‘s your uncle ? A. He ‘s OK . B. He ‘s busy . C. He‘‎ s a waiter.‎ ‎22‎ 1. Who ‘s the man a hat ?‎ A. wearing B. in C. A and B both are right 2. Martin comes to school in his father ‘s car.‎ A. sometime B. sometimes C. some times 3. Do you like to work the day or night ? A. in , at B. at , in C, in, in 4. There are going to have a picnic next week .‎ A. sometime B. some time C. sometimes 5. Lying in the sun on a beach sounds .‎ A. relax B. relaxed C. relaxing D. to relaxing 6. My grandpa enjoys Beijing Opera on radio.‎ A. listen B. listening C. listening to 7. What‘s his favorite music ? A. kind of B. kind C. kinds D. a kind 11. We milk the cows .‎ A. give, to B. get , from C. borrow , from , D. lend , to 12. I heard that there‘ s an crocodile in the polo.‎ A. cute B. lazy C. friendly D. ugly 改写句子 1. What does he do ? = his ? = he ?‎ 2. We like dolphins because they ‘re very cute.‎ ‎ you like dolphins ?‎ 3. He gave me a book . = He gave .‎ 翻译 ‎1. 动物园的动物对我们很友好 .‎ The animals in the zoo are us.‎ ‎2. 大象们喜欢和朋友们玩耍并且喜欢吃树叶。 Elephants like ‎ ‎ their friends and .‎ ‎3. 你想要一个忙碌但是令人兴奋的工作吗？‎ Do you want a but job ?‎ 4. 你想参演校园剧吗？ Do you want to the school play ?‎ 5. 吴老师喜欢穿黑夹克。 Mr Wu likes a black jacket.‎ 中考链接 1. The boy was able to himself when he was very young .‎ A. dress B. wear C. put on 2. The toy car is an interesting thing .‎ A. playing B. to play with C. play D. to play 教 后 录 ‎23‎ 课时授课计划 授课日期 年 月 日 星期 ‎ 课 题 （第 课时） Unit5-6‎ 基础知识巩固 课时教学 目标 ‎基础练习巩固 重点和难 点 ‎中考链接 教学媒体 A tape recorder , CAI 时 间 I. 重点词组 :‎ ‎教 师 活 动 设 计 学生活动 1. read a book =do some reading：读书 2. talk on the phone 打电话 talk about 谈论 3. wait for.... ：等候 4. be with sb：和某人在一起 5. TV show ：电视节目 6. sound terrible 听起来很可怕 7. cook dinner/supper ：做晚饭 8. pretty good ：相当好 9. on vacation：( 介词）在度假 ‎10. in this heat：在高温下 /在这么热的天 11. take photos=take a photo：拍照 12. be surprised：惊讶 (+从句 )‎ 13. a group of students：一群学生 14. look cool 看上去很酷 II. 重点句型 1. What is she doing on the beach ? 她在沙滩上干什么 ?‎ She is lying on the beach. 她正躺在沙滩上。 写出划线单词的原型、过去式、过去分词 ‎ 现在进行时： be doing 请写出 10 个需要双写的现在分词： 特别注意时间标志： 造句 :‎ ‎1）Look ! (put)‎ 2) Listen ! (chat)‎ 3) Don ‘t make any noise ! ‎ 4) Where‘s your father ? ‎ 2. Thanks for joining CCTV ‘s Around The World show. 谢谢你们观看中 ‎24‎ 央电视台的世界各地节目。‎ 易混淆词组：‎ ‎1）Thanks for doing sth. 因为某事而感谢你 造句：‎ ‎2）Thanks to = Because of 多亏了 由于 造句：‎ 1. How ‘s the weather in Beijing ? It ’rasiny .北京的天气怎么样？有雨 划线部分 = the weather ？ 请写出下列各词的形容词形式：‎ sun- , cloud- , snow- ,‎ rain- 同义词 , fog- , wind- .‎ It‘s rainy. 同义句：‎ There . 或 It .‎ ‎4.I ‘pmretty good ! 我很好！‎ 划线部分提问 it ? ：你怎么样？（两人见面时） 同义句： How ?‎ 5. Some are taking photos, others are lying on the beach . 一些人正在拍 照 , 另一些正躺在沙滩上。‎ Some others 一些 , 另一些 造句：‎ 易混淆词组：‎ ‎1）one the other (两者中 )一个 另一个 造句：‎ ‎2）another (三个或更多中的 )另一个 造句：‎ 6. I am surprised they can play in this heat . 是我吃惊的是他们能在这么 热的天打排球。‎ ‎1) be surprised at sth. 吃惊于某事 造句：‎ ‎2）be surprised to do sth . 吃惊的做 造句：‎ ‎3）to one‘s surprised 是某人吃惊的是 造句：‎ III. 练习 词汇 1. It‘s / / (hotter) today than yesterday .‎ 2. She likes taking part in many different /?k't v t 3. How was the /'wee ?/ yesterday ?‎ 4. He /'st d d/(studied) for the math test.‎ 5. Yesterday she bought two /ska:vz/ for her daughter .‎ 选择 ‎/z.‎ 1. ‎ ？ It ‘s raining .‎ A. What is it B. How is it going C. What ‘s the weather like 2. Some students like math, and like English .‎ A. others B. the other C. the others ‎25‎ 1. Mr Green for Tokyo tomorrow .‎ A. is leaving B. leaves C. is leave D. leave 2. ‎ ? I‘m reading newspapers.‎ A. Where ‘re you B. What do you do C. What‘re you doing D. How are you doing 3. It‘s pretty . Loot at the heavy snow !A. hot B. cool C. warm D. cold 翻译 ‎1. 有些学生在拍照，有些正躺在沙滩上 Some students are ‎ ‎ and on the beach. 2. 我吃惊的看到大热的天他竟然在生火。‎ I‘m see he is making fire in this .‎ ‎3. 谢谢你帮我学法语。 Thanks for me my . 4. 一群人正在打沙滩排球，他们真酷啊，真放松！ A group of people ‎ beach volleyball, they cool and .‎ 词形 1. Listen ! Someone (chat) outside.‎ 2. ‎--- What is Tom doing in the classroom? --- He (draw) something on the blackboard.‎ 3. It‘s ten o‘clock and Jack still (do) his homework.‎ 4. Be quiet! The children .(sleep)‎ 5. It‘s often (snow) in North China in winter.‎ 6. He (look) for his lost son these days .‎ 中考链接 1. Jenny wants to get job. She‘s tired of working here.‎ A. a B. one C. the D. another 2. Where is your father, Mike ? He in the kitchen.‎ A. cooks B. cooked C. is cooking D. has cooked 3. Here some good news from your parents. A. is B. are C. be 4. ‎ ? Not bad ! A. What's wrong B. How is it going C. What are you doing D. How do you think 5. It ‘s raining . You ‘d better not go out.‎ A. hard B. really C. heavilly D. A and C 6. What fine weather we have ! A a B. the C. / D. an 教 后 录 ‎26‎ 课时授课计划 授课日期 年 月 日 星期 ‎ 课 题 （第 课时） Unit 7-8‎ 基础知识巩固 课时教学 目标 ‎基础练习巩固 重点和难 点 ‎中考链接 教学媒体 A tape recorder , CAI 时 间 I. 重点词组 :‎ ‎教 师 活 动 设 计 学生活动 1. curly/straight hair 卷 /直发 2. have a beard 留胡子 3. be of medium height/build ：中等高度 /身材 4. look like ：看起来象 5. good-looking 长得好看 6. the captain of： .队长 7. a little bit ：有点儿 8. stop doing sth.：停止做某事 stop to do sth 停下来做另一件事 9. a new look ：一个新的形象 10. love to tell jokes 喜欢说笑话 11. not any more 不再，再也不 12. a small/medium/large bowl of ：小 /中 /大碗的 13. green tea：绿茶 14. tomato soup：西红柿汤 II. 重点句型 1. What does he look like ? 她长得怎么样？‎ She is of medium build , and she has curly hair. 她中等身材，留着卷发。 划线部分 = What he ?‎ 试总结有关 look 的词组并造句：‎ ‎①：‎ ‎②：‎ ‎③：‎ ‎④：‎ ‎⑤：‎ 2. She never stops talking. 她总是说个不停。 同义句： She always . 注意： stop doing sth 停止做某事 造句：‎ ‎27‎ stop to do sth 停下来做另一件事 造句：‎ 1. Do you remember the pop singer with funny glasses and long curly hair ? 你还记得那个戴着滑稽眼镜留着重卷发的流行歌手吗？‎ 词组 remember to do sth . 记得做某事 造句：‎ I remembered the singer with funny glasses and long curly hair.‎ 划线部分提问： singer you remember ?‎ 2. He doesn‘t wear glasses any more.他不再戴眼镜了。 同义句： He glasses .‎ 3. I think he is so great . 我认为他很棒。 否定句： I think he so great . 拓展： I suppose he will arrive late . 否定：‎ 4. What kind of noodles would you like? Beef and tomato noodles. 你想要 哪种面条？西红柿牛肉面。‎ would like (sb)to do sth 想要 (某人 )做某事 造句：‎ 同义词组：① ② ‎ 将 划 线 的 句 子 用 同 义 词 组 替 换 ： What kink of noodles ‎ ?‎ 选择： Would you like some coffee ? A. some B. any C. a few 7. 用食物或饮料名称填空：‎ Supper is ready . Mom cooked many kinds of . Look , too many ‎ are in the bowl . And there is lots of and on the plates. Dad like , so Mon repaired a bit of . Oh, how delicious !‎ III. 练习 词汇 1. Give /ri:z ?nz/ for talking like that.‎ 2. Do you know the man with /gla:s z/?‎ 3. She is more /'p pjul ?/ (popular) than him in our class.‎ 4. She is of medium /ha t/.‎ 5. She is /'hev / than her sister.‎ 6. Would you like two /p ?'te t?uz/ ?‎ 选择 1. What his sister ? She is tall .‎ A. is , look B. does, like C. does, look like 2. She happy to see the picture. A. looks B. likes C. looks like 3. Stop , boys ! You ‘re a bit noisy ! A. talk B. to talk C. talking 1. Would you like tea ? No, thanks. A. some B. any C. a few 2. You‘ve watched TV for 2 hours. Why not ?‎ A. stop playing games with us B. to stop dancing C. stop to play soccer D. to stop to lie in bed ‎28‎ 1. Is there anything to eat ? I ‘m hungry ! How about some ？‎ A. green tea B. red tea C. oragne juice D. beef and tomatoes 翻译 ‎1. 你 想 要 哪 种 特 价 服 饰 ？ What of clothes you like ?‎ ‎2. 想来杯清茶吗？‎ Would you a cup of tea ? 3. 那个中等身材，有点胖的人是我的英语老师。‎ The man who is ‎ ‎ heavy is my English teacher.‎ ‎and ‎ ‎4. 你跟他很熟吗？当然了。那时，他很好看并留着短短的直发。‎ Do you ‎ ‎him ‎ ‎? Certainly . He was ‎ ‎and ‎ short hair at that time .‎ ‎5. 你还记得这个带着滑稽眼镜的流行歌手吗？‎ ‎= Do you remember the pop singer who is funny ?‎ 中考链接 1. There is still milk in the glass . A. little B. a little C. few D. a few 2. I‘ll go and climb the Western Hills this weekend. Would you like to go with me ? . Please call me when you go .‎ A. No, I won ‘t B. I won ‘t go C. Sorry, I ‘m busy D. Yes, I ‘d love to 3. ‎ shoes do you wear ? 35.‎ A. How long B. What size C. How wide D. What color 4. Ben, would you like to play football with us ? , but I have to wash the dishes first.‎ A. No, I can ‘t B. I don ‘t want to C. Yes, please D. I ‘d love to 5. What are you going to do this weekend ? I ‘d like my parnts.‎ A. to visit B. visit C. visiting 教 后 录 ‎29‎ 课时授课计划 授课日期 年 月 日 星期 ‎ 课 题 （第 课时） Unit 9-10‎ 基础知识巩固 课时教学 目标 ‎基础练习巩固 重点和难 点 ‎中考链接 教学媒体 A tape recorder , CAI 时 间 I. 重点词组 :‎ 1. do some reading：阅读 ‎教 师 活 动 设 计 学生活动 2. practice English ：练习英语 practice doing sth 练习做某事 3. study for ：为 准备 /学习 4.go for a walk 散步 5. talk show：脱口秀 6. stay at home 呆在家里 7. sit down 坐下 8. all day/night 整天 / 夜 9. be/get lost 迷路 10. help sb.do sth.：帮助某人做某事 11. make sb. do sth.：使某人做某事 12. decide to do sth.：决定做某事 decide on sth 13. think of=think about 考虑；认为 II. 重点句型 1. What about studying for the geography test ? 去准备地理考试如何？ 提建议的句子：‎ ‎① What/ how about doing sth.? 造句：‎ ‎② Why don‘t you do sth.? 造句：‎ ‎③ Why not do sth. ? 造句：‎ ‎④ Let ‘s do sth. 造句：‎ ‎⑤ Shall we/I do sth.? 造句：‎ 2. How did kids spend the weekend ? 孩子们是怎样度过假期的？ spend +时间 /金钱 +on/(in) doing sth 花费时间 /金钱做某事 造句：‎ 同义词组： 1） pay for 造句：‎ ‎2）cost sb.+ money 造句：‎ ‎3）It takes sb. + 时间 to do sth.‎ 造句：‎ 改写：① He spent 6,000 yuan on the coat.‎ ‎=He ‎ ‎=The coat ‎ ‎30‎ ‎② Carol spends one and a half hours exercising every day .‎ ‎= It .‎ 1. It ‘ s timtoego home. 该回家了 句型： It ‘s time to do sth . It ‘s time for sth. 该是 的时间了。 造句：‎ 2. He watched WangWang play with a frinedly black cat. 他看着汪汪和一 只友善的黑猫玩呢。‎ I found a small boy crying in the corner. 我发现一个小男孩在角落里哭。 总结相似句型：‎ 造句：‎ 变被动： I saw her dance yersterday . She .‎ 想一想 find 其他的用法：‎ 3. 这使我很高兴。 That makes me feel very happy .‎ 总结 make 两种常用形式并造句：‎ ‎1）‎ ‎2）‎ 4. We decided to play tennis. 我们决定打网球。‎ 将划线部分改写： 或 ‎ decide on sth. decide to do sth. 决定做某事 造句：‎ ‎7. 写出下列动词的过去式：‎ become- , begin- , bring- , buy- ,‎ come- , eat- , feel- , find- , get- , give- , go- , hear- ,‎ know- , make- , put- , run- ,‎ say- , see- , sit- , stand- , take- , teach- , tell- , write- .‎ II. 练习 词汇 1. She /r?ut/a letter to her father.‎ 2. At the / / (corner) of the street, a boy stood here , crying .‎ 3. She /felt/ very sad today .‎ 4. She dislikes singing Chinese / / (songs) .‎ 5. Yestday we / / (saw) the talk show on TV .‎ 选择 1. The news him sad.‎ A. made, feel B. made, to feel. C. make, feel D. makes, to feel 2. How beautiful your dress is ! How much did you for it ?‎ A. pay B. spend C. cost 3. It Miss Jones the whole day to clean the living room .‎ A. spent B. cost C. took 4. He decided Canada for a vacation . A. in B. on C. to 5. When your brother back ? About half an hour ago.‎ A. did, come B. had, come C. do , come D. have, come ‎31‎ 词形 1. ‎ the girls (give) you a warm welcome ? Yes, they did.‎ 2. Old Henry watched his dog (play) with a cat at that time.‎ 3. We often practice (speak) English.‎ 4. Have you mended your shoes ? Yes, I (mend) them twenty minutes ago .‎ 5. What about (stay) at home and (study) for the test ?‎ 翻译 ‎1. 该吃晚饭了。 It‘s time .‎ ‎4. 昨天我看一个很有趣的脱口秀度过了一整晚。 Yesterday I the whole night an interesting .‎ ‎5. 他喜欢听这个节目吗？‎ Does he the programme ?‎ ‎6. 我们一整天都在拥挤的购物中心买东西，很愉快。 We had fun ‎ in the malls .‎ ‎7. 我们决定晚饭不吃四川菜，太辣了！ We eat Sichuan food dinner , it makes us too hot !‎ ‎8. 他发现这个孩子迷路了。 He found the child ‎ ‎6. 他没有狗也没有家人。 He has and .‎ ‎= He have a dog a family .‎ 中考链接 1. We find English . A. use B. useful C. using C. used 2. Who cooked the supper today? I . A. did B. was C. am D. do 3. You can not imagine how much I beautiful ? A. paid B. took C. cost D. spent ‎buying this dress. Is it 4. Jane likes singing . We often hear her after class.‎ A. sing B. to sing C. sings D. sang 5. Where were you Friday evening ? A. in B. at C. on D. on the 6. ‎ on vacation ? I went to New York city . A. Where did you go B. Where are you going C. How about spending D. What about 7. I can‘t which pair of jeans to buy . They both look good on me.‎ A. like B. prefer C. decide D. follow 教 后 录 ‎32‎ 课时授课计划 授课日期 年 月 日 星期 ‎ 课 题 （第 课时） Unit 11-12‎ 基础知识巩固 课时教学 目标 ‎基础练习巩固 重点和难 点 ‎中考链接 教学媒体 A tape recorder , CAI 时 间 I. 重点词组 :‎ ‎教 师 活 动 设 计 学生活动 1. don ‘ t minddoing sth 不介意 2. can ‘ t st：an不d 能容忍 3. agree with sb.：同意某人意见 4. in fact ：事实上 ;实际上 5. a thirteen-year-old boy ：一个 13 岁的男孩 6. show sb sth = show sth to sb 把 给某人看 7. enjoy doing sth 喜欢做某事， enjoy sth 喜欢某事 8. be late for class：上课迟到 = arrive late for class 9. have to ：不得不 10. what else：别的什么 11. What ‘ s u：p什?‎ 12. in class 在课上 II. 重点句型 ‎么事？‎ 1. What do you think of sports shows? I don ‘t mind them. 你觉得体育节 目怎么样？ 我不在乎。‎ 划线部分改写： do you sports shows ?‎ ‎① don‘t mind doing sth. 不介意做某事 造句：‎ 选择： Would you mind me opening the door ? A. Certainly not . B. Of course not . C. Not at all . D. all above.‎ ‎② change one‘s mind 改变主意 造句：‎ ‎③ make up one‘s mind 下决心 造句：‎ 2. I have to be in bed by 10 o ‘clock. 我不得不在 10 之前躺倒床上。 划线部分改写： ‎ 一般疑问句： you be in bed by 10 o ‘clock ? Yes, I . No, I .‎ 否定句： I to be in bed .‎ ‎= 1 to be in bed .‎ ‎33‎ Must I stay at home ? No, you . 或 No, you .‎ 1. What else do you have to do ? 你们还有其他必须要做的吗？ 改写： do you have to do ? 拓展：翻译：今天的报上还有其它内容吗？‎ Is there ?‎ 2. I have too many rules in my house . 我家的规矩太多了。 区分： too many + 可数名词 表太多 造句：‎ too much + 不可数名词 表太多 造句：‎ much too + 形容词 表太 造句：‎ 填空： He was thirsty and drank water.‎ 3. I showed each student six things. 我给每个学生看了 6 样东西。 改写： I showed 6 things each the .‎ 填空： Each student (have) 6 things now . Each of the students (have)‎ The students each (have)‎ III. 练习 词汇 1. As we learn a language, we should know about its / 'k Λ lt?/.?‎ 2. Don ‘t talk too /'laudl /! Your baby sister is sleeping .‎ 3. Look ! He is /fa t η/ with his friends.‎ 4. It‘s /sed/ there used to be a church here.‎ 5. What /els/ do I have to do before class starts ?‎ 6. He must be home /ba /10 o‘clock.‎ 7. We shouldn‘t break the school /ru:lz/during the school days.‎ 8. Please / / (order) food by yourselves.‎ 选择 1. ‎ the story ? It ‘s great!‎ A. What do you think B. How do you like C. A and B 2. You do it if you really don ‘t want to .‎ A. needn‘t B. mustn ‘t C. can‘t D. couldn ‘t 3. Would you mind not here ? I ‘m doing my homwork.‎ A. sing B. singing C. to sing 4. There‘s wather in the fields because of the heavy rain.‎ A. too many B. too much C. many too D. much too 5. There are many trees on side of the road. A. every B. both C. each 6. ‎ ? I can ‘t stand them . A. What ‘re sitcomes like B. How do like soap operas C. When did the TV play start D. How ‘s it going 7. Dave his family photos us last Dunday .‎ A. showed, to B. shows, at C. show, with D. showed, around 翻译 ‎1. 她喜欢别人赞美她的外貌，不在乎年轻人怎么评价她 She nice words about her looks. And don‘t what ‎34‎ young people her. 2. 老师常常让我们在课上练习对话。‎ The teacher us the dialogue in class. 3. 事实上，我不知道他是否同意我的观点。‎ ‎ , I don ‘t know if he me.‎ ‎4. 你得帮你妈妈做饭吗 ?‎ Do you help your mother ?‎ ‎5. 你们学校有什么规矩吗？ are the at your school ? 6. 我喜欢阅读，并且愿意时常说说我的想法。‎ I enjoy and would like what I .‎ 词形 sing, wonderful , smell , put, do Last Saturday afternoon, a group of boys up their tent in the middle of a field. As soon as this , they cooked a meal over an open fire. They were all hungry and the food good. After a ‎ meal, they told stories and songs by the camp fie.‎ 中考链接 1. Jenny likes to play guitar, but she doesn ‘t like thrillers.‎ A. a, an B. a, the C. the, a D. the, /‎ 2. Here‘s your coffee, sir. Would you like ?‎ A. something other B. other anything C. anything else D. something else 3. The twins each an MP4, and each of them much time on it. A. have , spends B. have, spend C. has, pays D. has, takes 4. What do you think of her spoken English ? Oh, no one speaks .‎ A. better B. well C. best 5. Excuse me, please look at the sign . Sorry, I didn ‘t see. I ‘m putting out the cigarette. A. NO SMOKING B. NO PARKING C. NO ENTERING D. NO SWIMMING 6. Let ‘s go to the concert tonight, Michael ! Sorry, I . I have to help my mother witrh the housework.‎ A. mustn ‘t B. may not C. needn ‘t D. can‘t 教 后 录 ‎35‎ 课时授课计划 授课日期 年 月 日 星期 ‎ 课 题 （第 课时）第一轮复习八（上） Unit 1--2‎ 基础知识巩固 课时教学 目标 ‎基础练习巩固 重点和难 点 ‎中考链接 教学媒体 A tape recorder , CAI 时 间 一、词组 ‎教 师 活 动 设 计 学生活动 1. how often 多久一次 2. as for sth/doing sth 至于，关于 ‎3. of course=certainly=sure 当然 4. look after=take care of=care for 照 顾 ‎5. hardly ever 很少 6. surf the Internet 网上冲浪 7. the results of the student activity survey 学生活动调查结果 8. be good for my health 对我的健康有益 9. her eating habits 她 的饮食习惯 10. want us to eat junk food 想让我吃垃圾食品 11.‎ exercise twice a week 一周锻炼两次 12. go skateboarding 去滑板 ‎13. come home from school 放学回家 14. try to eat a lot of vegetables 尽量多吃蔬菜 15. healthy lifestyle 健康的生活方式 16. keep in good health=keep healthy =be in good health 保持身体健康 17. improve your English 提高你的英语水平 18. shop three or four times a month 一个月购物三次或者四次 19. have a cold 感冒 20. have a stomachache 胃疼 ‎21. have a toothache 牙疼 22. have a fever 发烧 ‎23. have a sore throat 喉咙疼 24. have a sore back 背疼 ‎25.lie down and rest 躺下休息 26.see a dentist 看牙医 ‎27.hot tea with honey 带蜂蜜的热茶 28.be stessed out 有压力的，紧张 的 29. at the moment 此时，现在 30. not until 直到 才 ‎31. host family 寄宿家庭 9. have a healthy lifestyle 有健康的生活方 式 32.eat a balanced diet 膳食平衡 ‎33.stay keep healthy 保持健康 34.traditional Chinese doctor 传统中医 ‎35. need some conversation practice 需要一些对话练习 二、句子 1. How often do you go to the movies? 你多久看一次电影？‎ 2. What does she do on weekends? 她周末做什么？‎ She often watches TV. 她经常看电视。‎ 3. Some students are very active and exercise every day.‎ 一些学生很活跃每天锻炼。‎ 4. The results for ―watch TV ‖are interesting. "看电视 ‖这一调查结果很有趣。‎ 1. She says eating more meatis bad for our health.‎ 她说多吃肉对我们的健康不好。‎ ‎36‎ 1. How many hours do you sleep every night? 你每晚睡几个小时？‎ 2. I‘m pretty healthy but she‘s kind of unhealthy.‎ 我相当健康，而她却身体有点差。‎ 3. My healthy lifestyle helps me get good grades.‎ 我健康的生活方式有助于我取得好成绩。‎ 4. Good food and exercise help me to study better.‎ 好食物和锻炼帮助我学习更好。‎ 5. Is her lifestyle the same as yours or different?‎ 她的生活方式和你的相同还是不同？‎ 6. So maybe I ‘m not very healthy, although I have one healthy habit. 所 以，虽然我有一个健康的习惯，但是也许我的身体不是很好。 (英 语， although 和 but 不用于同一句子中 )‎ 7. What sports do you play? 你做什么运动？‎ I play basketball and baseball. 篮球和棒球。‎ 8. What ‘s the matter ? =What ‘s wrong? =What ‘s up ?= What‘s the trouble ? 出什么事了 ?‎ ‎14.I hope you feel better soon .我希望你快点好起来 15. Chinese medicine is now popular in many western countries .‎ 中药现在在西方很多国家很受欢迎 16. Everybody gets tied sometimes . 有时每个人都会感到累。‎ 17. You should exercise to stay healthy . 你应该锻炼身体保持健康 18. I don ‘t think I ‘m improving . 我认为我没有进步。‎ 19. Eating Dangshen and Huangqi herbs is also good for this .‎ 吃党参和黄芪也对这个有好处 。 三、链接中考 1. She shops with her friends twice a week. ( 划线提问 )‎ ‎ she with her friends?‎ 2. They surf the Internet on weekends. ( 划线提问 )‎ ‎ they on weekends?‎ 3. My father wants me to drink more water. ( 划线提问 )‎ 4. She has a toothache. (划线提问 ) the with her ?‎ ‎ your father want you ?‎ ‎5. 你的生活方式和我的不同。 Your lifestyle . 6. 做眼操对我们的眼睛有好处。‎ ‎ eye exercises good our eyes.‎ 7. Peter has a cold . (一般疑问句 ) Peter a cold ? 8.They are looking after a baby now .( 同义句 )‎ They are a baby . 9.他们背部疼痛。 They a back . 10.现在他的歌曲很受青少年的欢迎。‎ Now his songs very teenagers .‎ ‎11.每天晚饭后，她最喜欢躺着休息。 She enjoys and . 12.如果你的膳食平衡，就能很容易得保持健康。‎ It ‘s easy stay , if you eat a .‎ ‎13.直到她妈妈到家，她才睡觉。‎ She didn‘t bed her mother home.‎ ‎37‎ 四、能力提升 ‎1、他的饮食习惯和她的一样吗？‎ ‎ his eating habits hers?‎ 2. We play football and baseball every day. ( 划线提问 )‎ ‎ they play every day?‎ 3. People should do more sports to keep healthy.(同意句 )‎ ‎=People should do more sports to .‎ ‎4.DearEditor,‎ I am writing 1 (say) that I am against 2 (build) a new zoo in our town. Zoos are terrible places for animals 3 (live). I 4‎ ‎ ( visit) a lot of zoos in my life and I 5 never ‎ (see) one I liked or one that was suitable for animals 6‎ ‎ ( live) in. just last week I visited a zoo and couldn ‘bet lieve what I 7 (see). The animals 8 (keep) in tiny cages and can hardly move at all. And they 9 only ( give)food once a day. Is this a good way for animals 10 (live)? I don ‘ t think so.‎ ‎5. He went to bed after he had finished the work.( 同义句 ) He go to bed he had finished the work .‎ ‎6.刘翔是中国最受欢迎的明星之一。‎ Liu Xiang is one of the stars in China .‎ ‎7.别紧张 . 一切都会好起来的。‎ Don ‘t be . Everything is going to be fine .‎ ‎8.吃太多的不健康食物会对身体有害的。‎ ‎ too much food good for body .‎ 教 后 录 ‎38‎ 课时授课计划 授课日期 年 月 日 星期 ‎ 课 题 （第 课时）八上 Unit 3 —— 4‎ 基础知识巩固 课时教学 目标 ‎基础练习巩固 重点和难 点 ‎中考链接 教学媒体 A tape recorder , CAI 时 间 一 Phrases：‎ ‎教 师 活 动 设 计 学生活动 1. babysit her sister =look after =take care of 照顾她的妹妹 2. spend time with friend 和朋友度过时光 3. go camping/ hiking /sightseeing/ fishing/shopping 去宿营 /徒步旅行 /‎ 观光 /钓鱼 /逛 4. go bike riding 骑车观光 5. go away for too long 离开很久 6. sleep a lot 睡大觉 7. go to Tibet for a week 去西藏一周 8. isit my friend in Hong Kong 拜访我在香港的朋友 9. how long 多久 10. relax at home 在家放松 11. send me a postcardfrom Hong Kong 从香港寄给我一张明信片 12.show me your photos =show your photos to me 给我看你的照片 13.get back to school =return to school 回到学校 14. rent videos 租录像 15. ask you a few questions about your vacation plans 问你几个关于假 期计划的问题 16. ask you about places to visit in China 问你有关去中国参观的地方 17.plan to have a very relaxing vacation 计划去度一个很休闲的假期 18.take a long vacation this summer 这个夏天度过一个长假 19. think about doing sth 考虑做某事 20. decide on sth 决定某事 decide on doing sth /decide to do sth 决定做 某事 21. want to do something different 想做些不同的事 22. finish doing sth 做完某事 eg.finish making my last movie 完成我的 上一部电影 ‎23.a good place to go sightseeing 去观光的好地方 24. leave for Hong Kong on Tuesday 在星期六 动身去 香港 leave Shanghai for Beijing 离开 上海去北京 25. take sth with sb 某人随身带去某物 26. can ‘ t watito do sth 迫不及待做某事 27. be famous for 以 而著名 be famous as 作为 而著名 ‎28 That sounds interesting 听起来很有趣 二 Sentences：‎ 1. What are you doing for vacation ? I‘m visiting my grandmother .‎ 假期中你打算做什么？我打算拜访我的祖母。‎ 2. What is he doing for vacation ? He is babysitting his brother.‎ 假期中他打算做什么？他要照顾他的弟弟。‎ th 1. When are they going ? They are going next week/on the 12‎ ‎/Monday.‎ ‎39‎ 他们什么时候去？他们将在下周 /十二日 /星期一去。 4.How long is he staying? He is staying for a week .‎ 他准备在那呆多久？他准备在那呆一周。‎ 5. What ‘s it like there ? 那个地方怎么样？‎ 6. Where are you going for vacation ? I ‘m going to Hawaii for vacation .‎ 你打算去哪度假？我打算去夏威夷度假。‎ ‎7.I heard that Canada is beautiful ,and I know there are many people there who speak French.‎ 我听说加拿大很美，我知道那有许多人讲法语。‎ ‎8.I hope I can forget all my problems. 我希望能忘掉所有的问题。‎ 9. I‘m planning my vacation to the south of Italy this weekend.‎ 我计划这个周末去意大利南部度假。‎ 10. Who are you going with ? I‘m going with my parents.‎ 你准备和谁一起去？我准备和我的父母亲去。 三、基础题 ‎1.What ‘s she doing for vacation? She is her sister. A babysit B babysits C babysiting D babysitting 2.When did you finish these picture?‎ A draw B drawing C to draw D drew 3. They are going to the countryside for vacation. are they for vacation?‎ 4. When are you going to Hong Kong?= When are you Hong Kong?‎ 5 Doing some exercise every day is important. 同义句 very imporant Some exercise every day.‎ 四 中考链接：‎ ‎1.I hear Mr. Smith is coming to give us a talk .‎ A in this afternoon B. on tomorrow morning C. at this evening D. next Monday morning 2. The boy with two dogs in the yard when the earthquake rocked the city.‎ A. is playing B.was playing C.are playing D.were playing ‎3.I hope you will have a good time there.=I hope you will ‎ ‎ there.‎ 4. Her sister is staying there from July 15 to August 20 .‎ ‎ her sister staying there ?‎ 5. I‘m going shopping with my mother.‎ ‎ going shopping ?‎ ‎6.他想问我有关我英语学习的情况 .‎ He wants me my ‎ ‎7. 你何时从伦敦回来？ When did you London?‎ ‎8 当你回家时，把你的照片给我看一下。‎ ‎from ‎ when you ‎ ‎ .‎ 八年级（上） Unit Four 一．词组 1. take the/a subway/boat to school = get/go to school by subway/boat ‎40‎ 乘地铁 /船上学 1. take the/a bus/train/taxi to work=go to work by bus/train/taxi 乘公 交车 /火车 /出租车上班 2. ride the/a bike to the subway station = go to the subway station by bike 骑车去地铁站 3. walk to school = get/go to school on foot 步行上学 4. drive to work 开车上班 5. go to school in one ‘s car/by car 坐车上学 6. how far/long/soon/often 多远 / 多长时间 /还有多久 /多经常 8.from home to school 从家到学校 9.take him to school 带他去上学 10. on the school bus= by school bus 乘学校班车 11. depend on 视 .而定，取决于 12. in other parts of the world 在世界的其他地方 13. means of transportation 交通方式 14. be ill in (the)hospital 生病住院 15. have a quick breakfast=have breakfast quickly 匆匆吃早饭 16. leave for school 动身去上学 ‎17.a large number of 许多 ,大量的 a small number of 少数 the number of 的数目 18.in North America 在北美 19 be different from 与 不同 20 think of 想起 ,认为 ‎21 get to= arrived at/ in=reach 到达 二 .句型 ‎1.How do you get to school ? I ride my bike (to school).‎ 你怎样到校上学 ?我骑自行车上学 How does he get to school? He walks to school.‎ 他怎样到校上学？ 他步行上学 2.How far is it from your home to school ? 你家离学校多远？‎ It ‘thsree miles/ten minutes on foot/ ten minutes 三英里 /步行十分钟 ‎wa‘lk.‎ 3. How long does it take you to get from home to school?‎ 从家到学校你通常花多长时间 ？‎ It takes me 25 minutes (to get from home to school).‎ 我需要二十五分钟 ‎(It takes sb some time to do something)‎ ‎（某人花多长时间做某事）‎ 4. be +距离 +(away) from 离某地多远 Li Lei ‘s home is about 10 kilometers (away)from school.‎ 李雷家离学校约十公里 5. That must be a lot more fun than taking a bus.‎ 那一定比坐公交车更有趣 6. How far do you live from the bus station ?‎ 你住的离车站有多远 ？‎ I live 10 miles from the bus station . 十英里 ‎7 He rides his bike to the bus station.= He goes to the bus station on his bike /by bike 他骑自行车去公共汽车站 ‎41‎ 8 Some students drive, other students / others take the bus.‎ 一些学生开车 ,另一些学生乘公共汽车 .‎ 9 In Japan, the most three ways of getting to school are bus, train and bike.‎ 在日本 ,最受欢迎的三种上学方式是公共汽车 ,火车和自行车 10 Let me have a look.‎ 让我看看 11 If you have a problem, you can ask a policeman.‎ 如果你有麻烦 ,可以找警察 ‎(以 if 一道的条件状语从句 ,主句用一般将来时态或情态动词 ,从句 用一般现在时态 )‎ If the car comes, you can get into it. If I have time , I will help you.‎ 三．基础练习 My mother spent 100 dollars on the coat. （同义句）‎ My mother spent 100 dollars coat.‎ My mother 100 dollars the coat.‎ My mother the coat 100 dollars.‎ The coat my mother 100 dollars.‎ 四．中考链接 1. It took several years to build Qinghai-----Tibet Railway.‎ ‎ it to build Qinghai----Tibet Railway?‎ 2. Nobody else in her class lives farther from school than her.‎ She from school in her class. 3.你通常花多长时间到校？ 它取决于交通方式。‎ ‎---How long it you to school ?‎ ‎---It means of transportation.‎ ‎4. It took him a year to finish his novel. （同义句）‎ He a year his novel.‎ 教 后 录 ‎42‎ 课时授课计划 授课日期 年 月 日 星期 ‎ 课 题 （第 课时）八（上） Unit 5 –Unit 6‎ 基础知识巩固 课时教学 目标 ‎基础练习巩固 重点和难 点 ‎中考链接 教学媒体 A tape recorder , CAI 时 间 I 词组。 后天 前天 顺便来我家拜访 去看医生 /牙医 为考试做准备 上钢琴课 本周末有太多作业 ‎教 师 活 动 设 计 学生活动 ‎(too much + 不可数名词， much too+ 形 容 /副词 ) another time 下一次 去听音乐会 谢谢你的邀请。 和校队一起进行网球训练 和我们一起来看电影 保持安静 假期后给我打电话 whole /all 整天 /一整天 讨论科学报告 直到晚上十点才有空 多于 与 不同 看上去一样 使 发笑 我和我双胞胎姐姐的照片 都喜欢（两者）参加聚会 公有的 更外向 /严肃 /活跃 以 开始 擅长 ‎* 注意 1 be bale to / can No one answer the question.‎ He tried hard and swim across the river.‎ ‎2 sure： 1> be sure to do 2> be sure that 3> make sure 3 keep 1> keep sb / sth+ adj. 2> keep sb doing ‎43‎ ‎4 写出下列词的比较级 warm nice big hot thin ‎ fat few ‎ ‎lazy ‎ ‎early slowly ‎ popular little bad far 5 He is calmer than me. ( 同义 )‎ 5 They are more athletic than us. ( 同义 )‎ 6 Chemistry is easier than physics. ( 同义 ) 8 I have more money than Jim. ( 同义 )‎ 9 Tom has more pens than Jenny. (同义 )‎ 10 His hands are bigger than Tony‘s. (同义 )‎ ‎11 修饰比较级的词 ‎ 修饰原级的词 ‎ II 句型 Can you come to my party on Wednesday?‎ 你来参加我周三的聚会吗？‎ Would you like come to my party?‎ ‎= Do you want to come to my party? Sure, I ‘ d love 当to.然了，我很乐 意。‎ I hope you can come to my party. Sorry, I can ‘ t非.‎ ‎--What‘ s today?今天几号 ?(-What was yesterday?)‎ ‎--It ‘ s Monday, the 14th-.-I(t was Sunday, the 13th.) I‘m more outgoing than my sister. 我比姐姐外向。 Although my hair is shorter than hers.‎ Although I have shorter hair than she/her.‎ 尽管我的头发比她的短。‎ Liu Ying is not as / so good at sports as her sister. Her sister is better at sports than Liu Ying.‎ 刘莹不像她姐姐那样擅长运动。‎ ‎常抱歉我不能去。‎ For me, a good friend likes to do the same things as me.‎ 对我来说，好朋友喜欢做和我一样的事情。‎ I don‘t think differences are important in a friendship.‎ 我认为友谊中存在不同是不重要的 Who do you think should get the job? 你认为谁应该得到工作？‎ III 基础练习 适当形式填空 ‎1> It rained yesterday as (heavy) as it does today. 2> Which girl is (athletic), Julia or Tina?‎ ‎3> The weather today is much (good).‎ ‎4> Ruby is (thin) and (funny) than me. 5> She is interested in this (interest)film.‎ ‎6> Frank is (good) at writing than at reading.‎ ‎7> Henry is the same (tall) as John.‎ ‎8> Yesterday we (hold) a party for Peter at his home. It (be) very interesting.‎ After school yesterday, Peter (take) to the movies by me.‎ While we (watch) movies, his other friends prepared his house.‎ ‎44‎ We (get) to his home at 7:00 pm. When he opened the door, we all said，“happy birthday to you ‖.‎ Then we (eat) the birthday cake, (sing) and danced. We played (happy) that day.‎ 句型转换 ‎1> It was Friday, the 12th yesterday. yesterday? 2> Do you want to join us? （同意句）‎ ‎ you us? 3> Why don ‘ t you come and play soccer with us?‎ ‎ come and play soccer with us?‎ ‎4> He has to get up early.(否定 ) He to get up early. 5> I ‘m busy tonight. I can ‘t go shopping with you. ( 合并 )‎ I ‘m busy go shopping with you.‎ ‎6> Thank you for inviting me. ( 同义 ) for your . 7> Can he work out the problem? ( 同义 )‎ ‎ he work out the problem?‎ IV 中考链接 句型转换 ‎1> Her sister is very outgoing.( 划线 ) her sister ? 2> This cake is 30 yuan. That cake is 60 yuan. ( 同义 )‎ This cake is 30 yuan that one. 3> I have two apples. He has two apples, too. ( 同义 )‎ ‎ are good at schoolwork.‎ ‎4> The older girl is more serious. ( 划线 ) is more serious? 5> Both of us are good at schoolwork.( 同义 )‎ ‎ are good at schoolwork. 6> Mike ‘s not so good at art as Billy. ( 同义 ) Billy ‘s at art Mike.‎ ‎8>.I study science very well.( 同义句转换 )‎ I am very science.‎ ‎10> Mr. Green has four English books. Mrs. Green has six English books ‎（合并为一句） .‎ Mr. Green has English books 11> Jack is the tallest in his class.( 同上 )‎ ‎Mrs. Green.‎ ‎=Jack is than in his class.‎ ‎=Jack is than in his class.‎ 教 后 录 ‎45‎ 课时授课计划 授课日期 年 月 日 星期 ‎ 课 题 （第 课时）八（上） Unit 7 — Unit 8‎ 基础知识巩固 课时教学 目标 ‎基础练习巩固 重点和难 点 ‎中考链接 教学媒体 A tape recorder , CAI 时 间 I. 词组：‎ ‎教 师 活 动 设 计 学生活动 1. make a banana milk shake 制作香蕉奶昔 2. peel three apples削三个苹果 3. cut up 切碎 4.put in into 把 放进 5. pour into 把 倒入 6. turn on turn down the blender 打开 关上搅拌器 ‎7.a cup of yogurt 一杯酸奶 8.two teaspoons of honey 两勺蜂蜜 ‎9.mix all up 把 都搅拌起来 10.boil the noodles 煮面 11. add salt to 给 加盐 12. put the butter on a slice of bread 把一片面包抹上黄油 13. chicken slices=slices of chicken 鸡肉片 14. put on the top 把 放在上面 15.a recipe for 的食谱 ‎16. green onion 葱 17.roll the pancake 卷起薄饼 ‎18.need to do 需要做 ‎1. hang out with friends 和朋友闲逛 2. buy a souvenir 买纪念物 ‎3. get his autograph 得到他的签名 4. win a prize 获奖 5. have a great time on the school trip 在校游中玩得开心 6. watch a dolphin show 看海豚表演 7. at the end of the day 在一天结束时 8. take the subway back to school 乘地铁返回学校 9. sleep late 睡得晚 10. go for a drive 开车去兜风 11. on my first day off 在我第一个休息日 12. put some of his old things out in the yard 把他的一些旧东西放进院子里 13. in my opinion 依我的观点 14. win first prize in yesterday ‘s singing competition 在昨天的唱歌比赛 中获得第一名 15. have a yard sale 庭院出售 ‎* Notice ‎1 turn on / off / down / up It ‘s one‘s turn to do sth 2 cut down / cut up ‎46‎ ‎3 疑问词 how many / how much II. 句子 :‎ 1. How do you make fruit salad? 你怎样制作水果沙拉？‎ ‎2.I need three oranges . 我需要三个橘子。‎ How many oranges do you need?你需要多少橘子？‎ ‎3.I need two bowls of orange . 我需要两碗橘汁。‎ How many bowls of orange do you need? 你需要多少碗橘汁？‎ How much orange do you need ?你需要多少橘汁？‎ ‎1.---Were there any sharks at the aquarium?‎ ‎---No, there weren ‘t any sharks.‎ 水族馆里有鲨鱼吗？没有。‎ 2. ‎---Did she take any photos? ---Yes, she did. 她照相了吗？是的。‎ 3. What else did you do on your last school trip?‎ ‎=What other things did you do on your last school trip?‎ 上一个校游日你还作了什么？‎ 4. We didn't go to the zoo last Sunday. We went to the park..‎ 上个周日我们没有去动物园，我们去了公园。‎ 5. The students watched a movie about dolphins.‎ 学生们看了一部关于海豚的电影。‎ 6. Class 9 had a great time on the trip.‎ 九班的学生们在校游中过得很愉快。‎ 7. What was your last day off like? =How was your last day off?‎ 你的上个休息日怎么样？ (be like)‎ 9. However, no one came to the sale because the weather was so bad.‎ 然而，没有人来买东西因为天气是如此糟糕。‎ 10. Luckily, we brought our umbrellas and raincoats, so we didn ‘t get wet.‎ 幸运的是，我们带了伞和雨衣，所以我们没有淋湿。‎ II 基础练习 用所给单词的适当形式填空 1. How watermelons do we need? ( much )‎ 2. We still need ten . ( orange )‎ 3. Would you cut up some for me? ( tomato )‎ 4. Ten minutes for you to make your favorite ( sandwich )‎ 5. Our teachers are to us. (friend )‎ 6. What would you like ( drink ), tea or coffee?‎ 7. Why you ( not stay ) at home? It ‘s so cold outside.‎ 8. Are you ( good ) than Jim at speaking English?‎ 9. Thanks for ( have ) us to your party.‎ 10. ‎ ( not drink ) too much milk when you are hungry.‎ be clean visit sound win buy see take get live 1．I help my father the car.‎ ‎2．I went to the museum and some souvenirs.‎ ‎3．There an old temple （庙） at the foot of the mountain before. 4．Last week I my aunt ‘s house .‎ ‎47‎ ‎5．We some really clever kids when we were in their school. 6．I think it very interesting.‎ ‎7．He in California and worked as an actor. 8．After that, they the bus back home.‎ ‎9．Who the first prize? Toky did.‎ ‎10． Tina Dean ‘s autograph and read it.‎ 中考链接 take get run write have On my last day off I a bus to the park with my best friend. We saw many beautiful flowers and grass everywhere. There were many people in it. Suddenly we saw a group of people under the tree. Some of them were shouting. My friends and I were surprised. We there and found a famous actor. He something. Some of fans his autograph. He also sung a song for us. We fun that day.‎ 1. I‘d like some coffee sugar in it. A. with B. over C. about D. for 2. Can you help me up the meat?‎ A. cut B. put C. give D. clean 3 Don‘t forget to turn the TV before you go to bed. A off B to C on D down 4 Kate, could you the radio a bit? Your father is asleep. A turn down B turn off C turn up D turn on 教 后 录 ‎48‎ 课时授课计划 授课日期 年 月 日 星期 ‎ 课 题 （第 课时）八年级（上） Unit 9---10‎ 基础知识巩固 课时教学 目标 ‎基础练习巩固 重点和难 点 ‎中考链接 教学媒体 A tape recorder , CAI 时 间 I. 词组 ‎教 师 活 动 设 计 学生活动 ‎1. too .to . 太 ..以至不能 2.because of 因为 1. major in 主修，专研 2. break the world record for hiccupping 打破打嗝的世界纪录 3. win a prize 获奖 4. hum songs 哼唱 5. play for one ‘s national team 效力于某国家队 6. some difficult pieces of music 一些难的乐章 7. in the 70 － year history of.. 在 七十年的历史中 ‎10.成长，长大 grow up ‎11.学习计算机科学 study computer science 12.同时 at the same time ‎13.到处 all over ‎14.一个交换生 an exchange student 15.上表演课 take acting lessons.‎ ‎16.刻苦认真地学习数学 study math really hard 17.搬到有趣的地方 move somewhere intresting 18.学会弹奏一种乐器 learn to play an instrument 19.找一份当语言老师的工作 find a job as a language teacher . 20.吃更健康的食品 eat healthier food ‎21.更好地与孩子们交流 communicate better with their kids 22.多锻炼保持健康 exercise more to keep fit 23.进行大量的体育锻炼 get lots of exercise II. 句型 :‎ 1. You are never too young to start doing things.‎ 你何时开始做事情都不嫌早。造句：‎ 2. He started writing music at the age of four .‎ 他四岁时就开始作曲了。同义句：‎ 3. It was a comedy called 叫做 ..的一部喜剧 造句： 4.He spendsall his free time with his grandson . 业余时间他和他的孙子一起度过 。‎ spend 的用法总结及与 takepaycost 的用法比较：‎ ‎49‎ ‎5.I saw her play when I was eight . 我八岁时就看到她弹了。‎ 6. He won the first prize in his group 同义句： 1） 2）‎ 在他的那组中他赢得了第一名。‎ 7. He stopped playing soccer because of his sore back .‎ 他因为背的疼痛就停止打篮球了。同义句：‎ 8. She becamethe number one women ’s singles player 她成为头号女子单打选手 9. What are you going to be when you grow up? 你长大了想做什么？‎ I ‘m going to be an actor . 我想当演员。‎ 10. How are you going to do that ? 你打算怎样做？‎ I ‘m going to take acting lessons. 我打算上表演课。‎ 11. Where are you going to work? I ‘m not sure yet.‎ 你打算到哪里工作？还不一定。 yet 的用法 12. When I grow up, I ‘m going to do what I want to do .‎ 我长大了，要做自己想做的事情。‎ 13. I ‘m going to find a part-time job for a year or two and save some money. 我准备找份兼职工作做一两年存些钱。‎ 14. I want to be rich and buy a big house for my parents.‎ 我想变得富有，给我父母买大房子。‎ II. 基础练习：‎ 1. He didn ‘t play for his national team because he was ill . (同义句 ) He didn‘t play for his national team his .‎ 2. When he was seven, he could hum some English songs . (同义句 )‎ ‎ of seven , he could hum some English songs .‎ 3. I saw that he was playing football . ( 同义句 ) I saw football .‎ 4. It took her ten hours to learn to ride a bicycle .( 同义句 )‎ She ten hours to ride a bicycle .‎ ‎5．She wants to be a computer programmer.( 同义句 )‎ She a computer programmer. 6.Mr Wang usually goes to work by bus. ( 同义句 )‎ Mr Wang usually a work.‎ 7. He does his homework every day. （否定句）‎ He his homework every day.‎ 8. The students have a school trip in spring.( 用 next week 改写 )‎ The students a school trip next week.‎ nd，1992 . (划线提问 )‎ 9. He was born in Suzhou on July 2‎ ‎ and was he born ?‎ 10. He is going to work hard at English this term.. (划线提问 )‎ ‎ he this term?‎ 11. He is going to be an engineer when he grows up. ( 划线提问 )‎ ‎ is he going to when he grows up?‎ 12. They are going to have an English party this evening. ( 划线提问 )‎ ‎ are they going to this evening?‎ 7. It takes me half an hour to get to the shop. ( 划线提问 )‎ ‎50‎ ‎ it take to get to the shop?‎ 7. The boy asked his mother (let)him go and play basketball.‎ 8. I ‘ m sorry to keep yo_u (wait)for a long time.‎ 9. It (take) him half an hour (finish) his homework yesterday. 17.All the people in the town are glad _ (hear)that a famous musician ‎ (give) a concert this Saturday evening. 18.I (write) to youas soon as I get to Shanghai.‎ ‎19.Mike (visit) several places since he came to Beijing. 20.他想主修经营管理 . He wants to mangement . 21.汤姆太激动了以至于不能说出一句话来 .‎ Tom was say a word .‎ ‎22.她想当一名记者是因为他喜欢与人交谈。‎ She‘s going to be a because she people.‎ ‎23.学校要举行一次艺术展览。 The school is going to . 24.我不确定我能拿高分。 I ‘m not if I can .‎ III. 中考链接 :‎ ‎1.―How long did it you this picture ? ‖―Five years . ‖‎ A.take , drawing B.spend, drawing C.pay , to draw D.take, to draw 2. There a talk show on CCTV-4 at nine this evening.‎ A. will have B.is going to be C. is going to have D. is having 3.-How was your day off?-----Pretty good. -We the history museum.‎ A. visit B. visited C. are visiting D. will visit 4. The box is so heavy that I can ‘t carry it . (同义句 )‎ The box is heavy me carry it .‎ 5. He began to learn the accordion at the age of 5 . (划线提问 )‎ ‎ he to learn the accordion ?‎ ‎6.在他业余时间，他总是喋喋不休。‎ He often never in his free time .‎ 教 后 录 ‎51‎ 课时授课计划 授课日期 年 月 日 星期 ‎ 课 题 （第 课时）初三英语第一轮复习八上 Unit 11‎ 基础知识巩固 课时教学 目标 ‎基础练习巩固 重点和难 点 ‎中考链接 教学媒体 A tape recorder , CAI 时 间 一．词组 :‎ ‎教 师 活 动 设 计 学生活动 ‎1.take out ( take it out) 拿出；取出 2.do/wash the dish es 洗 餐具 ‎3.sweep the floor 拖地板 (swept,swept) 4.make one ‘ s bed / make the bed 整理床铺 3 ‎. work on 从事，忙于 6. do chore s/housework 做家务；处理琐事 ‎7. take care of 照看，照顾 8. do the laundry =do some/ the washing 洗衣服 9. feed sb with sth 用 喂某人 feed sth to sb 把 喂给某人 / feed on 以, 为食 (fed, fed)‎ 10. hate to do sth 讨厌做某事（具体的事） hate doing sth 讨厌做某事（习 惯）‎ 11. borrow from 从 ,, 借入 lend to 把 ,, 借出 二．重点句子 :‎ 1. Could you please fold the clothes? Yes, sure./ Sorry, I can‘t. I have to .‎ 请你叠衣服好吗？可以，没问题。 / 对不起，我不能。我得 2. Could I invite my friends to a party? Yes, you can ./ No, you can‘t.‎ 我可以邀请我的朋友来聚会吗？可以。 /不可以。‎ 3. Do you like to sweep the floor? No, I don ‘t. . 你喜欢扫地吗？不， 我不喜欢。‎ 4. I don‘t like making the bed because it‘s boring. 我不喜欢整理床铺， 因为它无聊。‎ 5. I hate some chores, but I like other chores.我讨厌一些家务活，但我 喜欢另一些家务活。‎ 6. Have fun! See you next week. 祝你玩的开心。下周见。‎ ‎7．Thanks for taking care of my dog. 谢谢照顾我的狗。‎ ‎8. My mom gets really angry when I forget to clean my room.‎ 我忘了打扫房间的时候妈妈就会生气。‎ 三．句型转换：‎ 1. You'd better take out the trash.（否定） You'd better out the trash.‎ 2. She was late yesterday because she was ill.‎ ‎== She was late yesterday her illness 3. Don't forget to take an umbrella. == take an umbrella.‎ ‎52‎ 1. You take care of my dog when I was not at home. Thank you.‎ ‎==Thank you for my dog when I was not at home.‎ 四.综合测试： a. 基础练习：‎ ‎1．Jim doesn‘t like doing the chores because they are not interesting .‎ ‎ Jim doing the chores?‎ 2. Do you need (have) a rest?‎ 3. Thanks a lot for ( give)us so much good advice.‎ 4. Don ‘t forget (buy) some drinks and snacks.‎ 5. My mother hates (watch) football matches and she hates my father (watch) them.‎ b.中考链接：‎ ‎1. There is no need to thank me.‎ ‎.=You thank .‎ ‎2. 汤姆放弃了他的工作，现在在从事一部小说的写作工作。‎ Tom his work, now he's a new novel .‎ ‎4.我打算住进一所新房子。我需要一些帮助。‎ I ‘m ‎ ‎ . 5.补全对话：‎ Candy : Come on , Steve. . Steve: Wait a moment. . Candy : OK.‎ ‎a new house .I need some Steve: By the way, can we give my sister a ride home tonight?‎ Candy : Sure. .‎ Steve: Yes .She wants to take some pictures.‎ Candy :‎ Steve: Yeah. She wants to work for a newspaper someday.‎ Candy : But I think it might be hard for her to succeed.‎ A. Well ,she always enjoys sports games, doesn ‘ t she?‎ B. I did ‘ t know Eva was interested in photography.‎ C. There are a lot of photographers out there.‎ D. You mean she `s coming to the game, too?‎ E. I just have to close up the shop.‎ F. It ‘ s time to go G. Eva ‘ s closing the door.‎ is 教 后 录 ‎53‎ 课时授课计划 授课日期 年 月 日 星期 ‎ 课 题 （第 课时）初三英语第一轮复习八上 Unit 12‎ 基础知识巩固 课时教学 目标 ‎基础练习巩固 重点和难 点 ‎中考链接 教学媒体 A tape recorder , CAI 时 间 一．词组：‎ ‎教 师 活 动 设 计 学生活动 ‎1.radio station 无线电台 2.talent show 才艺表演 3. do a survey of the reader 在读者中做调查 4. play the most interesting music 播放最有趣的音乐 5. as for movie theaters 至于电影院 6. the funniest person I know 我所认识的最风趣的人 7. win the prize for the best performer 获得最佳演员奖 8. play a beautiful piano piece 演奏一曲优美的钢琴曲 9. dance without music 没有音乐伴奏跳舞 10.the loudest musical group 最响亮的音乐组合 ‎11.in northern/southern China 在中国北方 /南方 12.cut their prices 打 折，降价 ‎13. need some more actors for the talent show 才艺表演还需要几位演员 二．重点句子 :‎ 1. It has the bi ggest screens 最大的屏幕 friendl iest service 最热情的 服务 most comfortable seats 最舒适的座位 best/worst quality clothe 质量最好 /差的衣服 worst music 最差的音乐 It is the closest tohome. 它离家最近 2. What ‘s the best clothing store in town ?没城里最好的服装店是哪 家？‎ 3. It has really bad service. 它服务质量实在太差 4. This cinema has better/worse service than that one.‎ 这家影院的服务质量比那家好 /差 5. Who do you think is the most creative performer? 你认为谁是最具创意 的演员？‎ 6. The prize for the funniest act went to Steve Tian. 最有趣奖由 Steve Tian 所获得。‎ 7. Last week‘s talent show was a great success. 上周的才艺表演取得了 巨大成功。‎ 三．综合测试 ‎54‎ a.基础练习 ‎1.写出比较级和最高级 strong close ‎ friendly hot boring popular ‎ bad/badly/ill good/well little ‎ far many/much ‎ 2. I think math is the (important) of all the subjects.‎ 3. In my family, my mother is (busy).‎ 4. He thinks the computer is the second (useful) invention.‎ 5. I think Jack runs fastest in his class.‎ ‎== Nobody else can run he in his class.‎ 6. Beijing , the capital of China, is one of cities in the world.‎ A. the biggest B. bigger C. much bigger D. big ‎7. 至于这个旅馆，它很舒适而且距离海只有数英里远。‎ ‎ the hotel, it is very and only miles ‎ the sea.‎ b.中考链接 1. We did a survey of some readers. （否定句）‎ We a survey of readers.‎ 2. This is gift I have ever received. I love it very much.‎ A. the best B. better C. worse D. the worst 3. Don‘ t worry. He is to take care of little Betty.‎ A. carefully enough B. enough careful C. careful enough 4.Jason ‘的s服装质量比 Trendy Teens 差 Jason ‘ s has clothes than Trendy Teens.‎ ‎5.他不辞而别 He left goodbye.‎ 教 后 录 ‎55‎ 课时授课计划 授课日期 年 月 日 星期 ‎ 课 题 （第 课时）初三复习八下 Units 1-2‎ 基础知识巩固 课时教学 目标 ‎基础练习巩固 重点和难 点 ‎中考链接 教学媒体 A tape recorder , CAI 时 间 基础知识巩固 I 词组 ‎教 师 活 动 设 计 学生活动 1) fall in love with 爱上（某人和某物 2) the same as与。。。同样 3) keep out 不让 进入 4) 和某人相处得好 get on well with 5) argue with sb. about sth. 就某事于某人谈论 6) come true 实现 7) out of style 不时髦的 ,过时的 8) call sb. up 打电话给 (某人 )‎ 9) pay for 付。。。帐 10) compare with/to 对比。比较 11) on the one hand;on the other hand（在）一方面 在另一方面 ‎12) fit into 找到时间（做某事）‎ ‎13) as as possible 尽可能 II 句型 1 Will there be fewer trees in the future ? No, there won ‘t .‎ 未来将会有更少的树吗？不，将不会的 ‎2 What‘s wrong?=What ‘s the matter ? 怎么了 ? 3 What should I do ? You could write him a letter . 我该做什么？ 你可以给他写信 基础知识 I 用所给词的适当形式填空 1. Mothers ‘ Day is coming. I (buy) a gift for my mother.‎ 2. Everyone else (be) at the party last Sunday except (I)‎ 3. Shall we invite the alien (see) Harry Potter and the Prisoner of Azkaban?‎ 4. Mr. Wang told us (work) hard for a brighter future..‎ 5. I was at the (doctor) from 9:00-9:30 on Saturday morning.‎ II 选择填空 ‎( ) 1We can see stars at night if there sre no clouds in the sky. A thousand of B thousands of C a ‎ thousand ‎( ) 2She doesn ‘ t want to talk it the phone.‎ ‎56‎ A. over, about B. with, on C. about, on D. to, over ‎( )3 The students found problems .‎ A that B it C one D this ‎difficult to work out the maths ‎( ) 4 Tell your friend buy the same clothes as you do.‎ A. don ‘ t B. not C. not to D. don ‘ t to ( )5 There will be even pressure in 10 years.‎ A. little B. few C. more D. fewer ‎( )6 There will be healthy food in the future because of all kinds of pollution .‎ A fewer B less C much D more ‎( ) 7There a personal computer in his or her home .‎ A is going to have B will have C is going to be D are going to be ‎( )8 do you think Jane will be in 2020? ---- She will be a famous nurse. A Who B What C How D When ‎( )9---With the machine , we can do the work with money and ‎ people .----That sounds wonderful A less, fewer B fewer,less C fewer, fewer D les, less ‎( )10 My father got really me because I my physics test.‎ A. angrily with, passed B. angry with, failed C. angrily at , passed D. angrily at, failed.‎ II 句型转换 ‎1 There will be fewer cars twenty years from now.( 一般疑问句并做否定 回答 )‎ ‎ there fewer cars twenty years from now.? No, ‎ ‎２ He seemed to know the whole thing 同意句改写）‎ ‎ that he knew the whole thing 3 There won ‘t be as much pollution in the future as now . （同意句改写）‎ There will in the future than now 4 The teacher is so kind that all the students like her . 同意句改写）‎ She is a kind teacher all the students like her .‎ 5 Most people will never use telephones.( 改为被动语态 ) Telephones will never most people. 6 It‘s bad for your health to play the CDs too loud. （同义改写）‎ ‎ the CDs too loud bad for your health.‎ 中考链接 ‎( ) 1School allow students at least one hour a day for sports .(07‎ 安徽 )‎ A would B could C should D might ‎( ) 2 Our family bought a car so we can travel than before .‎ A most easily B less easily C easily D more easily ‎( ) 3 –When the students to National Art Nuseum of ‎57‎ China ? --After they finishtheir classes this afternoon.‎ A did, go B will go C do, go ‎( )4 –Where the 2010 World Expo (世博会 ) ?--- In Shnaghai .‎ A does; hold B is , held C will, be held D will, hold ‎( )5Can you imagine that little ants can carry many big worms ?‎ A so, so B such, such C such, so D so, such ‎( )6 –I hear that Li Zhongtian will come to Wuhanand give a talk.‎ ‎-Really? Do you know ?(08 安徽芜湖 ) A what will he talk about B what will he give a talk C How will he come D when he will come ‎7 like this radio advice program. （同义改写）‎ It seems that everyone likes this radio advice program..‎ ‎8 他过去玩电脑游戏的时间太多，结果对学习不感兴趣了。‎ He much time in computer games that he wasn‘t interested in his lessons ‎.9 下周我要去香港度假， 我想我一定会很快爱上这个城市。‎ Next wewk I ‘ll Hong Kong and I think I ‎ it soon .‎ ‎10 50 年后世界会是什么样子？ the world ‎ ‎ 50 years ?‎ ‎11 你同意这儿有更多地污染的说法吗？ Do you ‎ ‎ here ?‎ ‎12 下周你能穿得更随意些吗？‎ Will you ?‎ ‎there 教 后 录 ‎58‎ 课时授课计划 授课日期 年 月 日 星期 ‎ 课 题 （第 课时） Units3-4‎ 基础知识巩固 课时教学 目标 ‎基础练习巩固 重点和难 点 ‎中考链接 教学媒体 A tape recorder , CAI 时 间 基础知识巩固 I 词组 get out 出去 take off 起飞 as .as 像。。。 一样 run away 逃跑 come in 进来 hear about 听说 take place 发生 first of all 首先，起初 pass on 传递 ‎教 师 活 动 设 计 学生活动 be supposed to被期望或被要求 do well in / be good at 在某方面做得好 be /keep in good health 身体健康 be / get mad at /with sb. 生某人的气 get over 克服；恢复；原谅 open up the students‘eyes 开阔学生的视野 care for wild animals in danger 照顾处于危险中的野生动物 II 句型 1. While the boy was walking down the street ,the UFO landed .‎ 2. The girl was shopping when the alien got out 同义句 :‎ 3. What were you doing when the World Trade Centre in New York was destroyed by terrorists ?‎ ‎4. Ben told Lana that Marcia was going to have a surprise party for her 5. She said ,‖Iam not mad at Marcia. ‖ She said that she wasn‘t mad at Marcia .‎ 6. You were supposed to meet at the bus stop this morning to return it 7.She asked me,―Can I copy your homework.? ‖ 同义句 :‎ ‎8.I said I didn ‘t think it was a good idea for her to copy my homework.‎ 练习 I 基础知识 ‎59‎ 直接引语 变为间接引语：‎ 一变人称（一看主， 述句 - 时态一致）‎ 二看宾， 三不变），二 改宾从（加连词 ‎- 改陈 ‎1 陈述句的间接引语 He said, “ I am not mad at Ben anymore ‎”‎ He said that at Ben anymore .‎ 2 一般疑问句的间接引语 The doctor said to her , “ Are you feeling bettter mow ? ”‎ The doctor her feeeling better then .‎ 3 特殊疑问的间接引语 “ What do you think of the movie ? ” She asked me She asked me of the movie .‎ 4 祈使句的间接引语 My mother said , “ Don ’t eat too much unhealthy food . ”‎ My mother me too much unhealthy food.‎ 句型转换 1. She was playing computer games at this time yesterday.( 划线提问 )‎ ‎ she at this time yesterday?‎ 2. She was playing computer games at this time yesterday.( 划线提问 )‎ ‎ she at this time yesterday?‎ 3. Tom watched TV yesterday afternoon.( 用 at three yesterday 改写句子 ) Tom TV at three yesterday 4. ‎― Can I copy your homework? ‖ he ask(变ed为m间e.接引语 ) He asked me copy homework. 中考链接 1. While the woman was shopping, she saw the UFO .‎ A. taking off B. takes off C. took off D. take off 2. When he home, his mother was cooking.‎ A. arrive in B. got C. got to D. reaching 3.There are students in this school .‎ A thousand of B thousands of C thousand s for 4. I was very surprised that my worst report was from my science.‎ A. to find B. to find out C. finding D. finding out 6 The teacher told us the moon around the earth.‎ A. went B. goes C. going D. move 7 I said it would a bad habit, and that she should do work.‎ A. get, own her B. start, her own C. become, own her D. keep, her own of ‎60‎ 二、1I saw Lisa in the street yesterday, but she didn ‘t see me. She the other way.(2008 徐州 )‎ A. was looking B. is looking C. looked D. has looked 2. We do hope the people in Sichuan will soon their troubles. （2008 宁波）‎ A. get over B. turn over C. go over D. look over ‎3.--- Dick gave me a note while I in the library. （ 2007 黄冈）‎ ‎---- I guess he made it to say ―sorry ‖to you.‎ A. am reading B. was reading C. reads D. will read ‎4. ―How do you look after your pet cat? ‖my teacher asked me.（ 2007 济 南）‎ My teacher asked me after my pet cat. 5.‖ Dont‘run in the hallway. ‖Miss Zhao said to us. （ 2007 山西） Miss Zhao us run in the hallway.‎ ‎6. The girl was shopping when she saw the accident. （2007 南京）‎ ‎ the girl when she saw the accident?‎ 教 后 录 ‎61‎ 课时授课计划 授课日期 年 月 日 星期 ‎ 课 题 （第 课时） 八年级下 Units5-6‎ 课时教学 目标 ‎基础知识巩固 基础练习巩固 重点和难 点 ‎中考链接 教学媒体 A tape recorder , CAI 时 间 一、基础知识巩固 I 词组 ‎教 师 活 动 设 计 学生活动 take away 拿走 make a living 谋生 all over the world 全世界 all the time 一直 let in 允许某人进入 have a difficult time doing sth.做某事有困难 in order to improve my English 为了提高英语 get an educatioe 接 受教育 make money 赚钱 give money to 向。。。捐款 raise money for charity 为慈善机构募捐 run out of/ use up 用完 by the way 顺便一提 be interested in 对。。。 感兴趣 far away 远离 II. 句型 1 If you go to the party, you will have a good time.‎ 2 What will happen if they have the party today? Half the class won ‘t come.‎ ‎3.And if you become rich, you will have a difficult time knowing who your real friends are .‎ ‎4 How long have you been collecting shells?‎ I have been collecting shells for two years. 同意句：？‎ ‎5. The more I learn about Chinese history, the more I enjoyed living in China.‎ 造句：你越仔细，你出的错越少． 练习 ‎62‎ I 基础知识 用所给动词的正确形式填空 1. If it ( rain) tomorrow ,I ‘ll stay at home .‎ 2. If it ( be ) fine , We ( go) swimming together . 3.He asked me if I ( be ) free this Sunday.‎ ‎4.I don‘t know if he ( come ) tomorrow. If he ‎ ( come) , I ‘ll call you .‎ ‎5.We ?re ( leave) for France in a week .‎ ‎6.---How long your father (work) in the factory?‎ ‎---Since he (leave) college ‎7 How long you (listen) to music last night?‎ 8. Some of the old buildings are in (Russia) style.‎ 9. He is always the first one (arrive) at school and the last one (leave) school.‎ 10. We (be) friends for the whole ten years.‎ ‎11 (collect) old coins is my father ‘ s hobby.‎ 句型转换 1. If you don't hurry up, you'll miss the early train.( 同义句 )‎ ‎ , you'll miss the early train.‎ 2. He plays sports for a living.( 同义句 )‎ He by .‎ 3. They had a great time in the park. ( 同义句 ) They in the park.‎ 4. Why don ‘t you take your ID card? ( 同义句 )‎ ‎ your ID card?‎ 5. They have been talking for three hours.( 一般疑问句 )‎ ‎ they for three hours?‎ 6. She‘s been painting for two years ( 对划线部分提问 )‎ ‎ she painting?‎ 7. He‘s been learning Chinese history for three years.( 同义句 )‎ He‘s been learning Chinese history ‎ 选择填空 1. These are your books. Please .‎ A. take them away B. take it away C. take away them D. take away it 2. If you hard, you a good grade.‎ A. won ‘t work, don ‘t get B. don ‘t work, won ‘t get C. work, get D. will work, get ‎3 .Do you know if back next week? If he back, please ‎63‎ let me know.‎ A. he comes, will come B. will he come, comes C. he will come, comes D. will he come, will come 4. If we free next week, we to the farm to visit you.‎ A. will be, will go B. am, will go C. will be, go D. be, go 5. I‘ll help people if I am a lawyer.‎ A. can B. be able to C. could D. able to 6. Why are you against the Lions?‎ A. join B. to join C. joining D. joins 7.He is interested in English songs.‎ A. to collect B. collect C. collecting D. collected 8.He has been listening to music for .‎ A. one and a half hour B. one half hour C. one and a half hours D. half one hour ‎.中考链接：‎ 1. I‘m waiting for my friend. , I ‘ll go shopping alone. （2008 重庆）‎ A. If she comes B. If she will come C. If she doesn‘t come D. If she didn ‘t come 2. The more you read, you will get. （ 2008 青岛）‎ A. the less B. the most C. the more D. much more 3. After Wenchun earthquake, people got together on Tian ‘anmen Square, calling out ―Come on, China! ‖（ 2008 衡阳）‎ A. four thousand of B. thousands of C. several thousands 4. We have been good friends we joined the same ping-pong team.‎ ‎（ 2007 陕西）‎ A. after B. for C.since D. until 教 后 录 ‎64‎ 课时授课计划 授课日期 年 月 日 星期 ‎ 课 题 （第 课时）八下 UNITS 7-8-‎ 基础知识巩固 课时教学 目标 ‎基础练习巩固 重点和难 点 ‎中考链接 教学媒体 A tape recorder , CAI 时 间 基础知识巩固 I 词组 ‎教 师 活 动 设 计 学生活动 1. mind doing sth 介意做某事 2. not at all 一点也不 3. right away 立刻 in a minute 4. turn up/ down the music 把音乐音量调低 / 高 turn it on /off 打 开 / 关上 5. wait in line 排队等候 cut in line 插队 cutting 6. break/ obey the rules of etiquette 违反 / 遵守礼仪规则 7. pick it/ them up 把它捡起来 8. hear of 听说 9. make friends with 与 交朋友 10. take an interest in 对 感兴趣 be/ become interested in 11. encourage to do sth 鼓励 做 II 句型 Would you mind (not) doing sth? Could you please (not) do sth?‎ Please do sth.提出建议 ,请求 你介意挪一下椅子让我过去吗？ 翻译： Why don ‘t you get her a scarf? 为什么不给他买一条围巾呢？‎ 拓展：用其他提建议的句式表达 提醒：如果别人向你提建议，肯定回答可用 Good idea./ OK!/Certainly./ O course./ All right. / With pleasure./ I ‘d love to. 等。‎ 否定回答可用： No, thanks./ I ‘m afraid not./ No, I don ‘t think so./ Sorry, w can‘t.等。‎ 3. 花费 :sth cost sb money -----‎ The book cost me 10 yuan. 这本书花了我 10 元 . It takes /took sb to do sth. ------‎ It took me 10 days to read the book. 读这本书花了我十天时间。‎ Sb spend money/ time doing sth /on sth -----‎ I spent 10 yuan buying/ on the book. 我花了 10 元钱买这本书。‎ Sb pay money for sth. ----‎ I paid 10 yuan for the book. 我花 10 元钱买了这本书。‎ ‎65‎ pay sb money 付钱给某人 提醒：过去式 :pay-paid cost- cost spend-spent take-took 3. Smoking on the bus is not allowed. 车上不准吸烟 .‎ Talking loudly in a library is not polite/impolite. 在图书馆里大声讲话是不礼 貌的 .‎ 动名词作主语。 造句：‎ 练习 I 基础知识 The summary of reading on Page P66 阅读简写 . Why don ’t you learn to sing English songs?‎ Because China will be the host for the 2008 Olympics, many Chinese people are trying ( improve) their English in different ways.‎ ‎ (sing) English songs is one way. Singers from across China ‎ (enter) a contest by singing English songs. Some of them were able to sing English songs just as (good)as native speakers. A winner said singing English songs (help) her win the prize and made her more (interest) in learning English. So this kind of contest encourages people in China (speak) English. And it is a good idea to have fun with English. Besides (sing) English songs, there are many other fun ways to learn English, like ‎ (watch) English movies , reading English books, joining an English club and making friends with native speakers. Do you have any other good ways (learn) English better?‎ 句型转换 1. Would you please do this? ( 否定句 )‎ Would you this?‎ 2. I must leave now in a munite. ( 同义句 )‎ I leave now .‎ 3. We were too tired to go anymore.( 同义 )‎ We were we go anymore.‎ 4. I got my camera on my tenth birthday. （对划线部分提问）‎ ‎ get your camer？a 5. It‘s better to keep your voice down in public.( 同义 ) You keep your voice down in public.‎ 根据汉语完成句子 ‎1．我点了一个干酪汉堡包，但服务员却拿来了一个热狗。 I a but the waitress got me a hot dog.‎ ‎2．我们应该尽量做到不烦恼。‎ We should try be .‎ ‎5．这支钢笔没法用，你可以再给我看一支吗？‎ This pen doesn ‘ t . you showing me one?‎ ‎5．我在学校图书馆总有这样的事发生。‎ This to me in the school library.‎ ‎66‎ ‎6 ． 我 洗 完 盘 子 你 能 帮 我 做 作 业 吗 ？ Could you me my homework I doing the dishes?‎ ‎7. 学习英语最好的方式是与英语国家的人们交朋友。‎ The English is making friends people in English-speaking countries.‎ ‎9. 在他六岁生日的时候，他收到一份特别的礼品。 （翻译）‎ He a present his birthday.‎ ‎10. 他并没去广州，反而去了上海。‎ He go to Guangzhou. , he went to Shanghai.‎ II 中考链接 ‎1.[08 宁波 ]-Mike, would yo mind not wearing those old jeans? They look terrible. -- .‎ A. Ok. I ‘ll put on another pair.‎ B. Sure. I ‘ll do it right away.‎ C. Sorry, I won ‘t be long.‎ D. Alright. I ‘ll do them in a minute.‎ 2. ‎[08 宾州 ]- Would you mind sweeping the floor?‎ ‎- .‎ A. Yes, of course B. Ok. You ‘re right C. Sorry. I ‘ll do it right away D. Not at all. Here you are ‎3.[07 重庆 ] Remember to classroom.‎ ‎the lights when you leave your A. turn on B. turn off C. turn up D. turn down ‎4.[07 连云港 ]After eight hours ‘hard work, the firemen finally the forest fire.‎ A. put away B. put out C. put down D. put in 5.[07 烟台 ]根据汉语意思完成单词 I won ‘t go there with you. I ‘ll stay here ( 代替 ) 6. [07 济宁 ] 根据汉语意思完成单词 When we meet with difficulties, our teacher always ( 鼓励 )us to work them out by ourselves.‎ 教 后 录 ‎67‎ 课时授课计划 授课日期 年 月 日 星期 ‎ 课 题 （第 课时）八下 units 9-10‎ 基础知识巩固 课时教学 目标 ‎基础练习巩固 重点和难 点 ‎中考链接 教学媒体 A tape recorder , CAI 时 间 基础知识巩固 I 词组 ‎教 师 活 动 设 计 学生活动 1) have a good time/ have fun/ enjoy oneself 玩得愉快 2) end up doing 以 结束 :结果为 : 3) three quarters 四分之三 ‎4) practice doing 练习做某事 5)wake up 醒来 6)look through 浏览 ‎7) get along with 相处 8) at least 至少 9) look like rain 看起来要 下雨 ‎10)come along （意外）出现；发生；来到 11) feel like doing 想要 做 II 句型 1 Have you ever been to an amusement park ? No, I haven ‘t ‎.你去过娱乐场吗？不，我没去过。‎ 2 I have been to an aquarium a lot of times. Me, too 我去过水族馆许多次。 我也去过多次。 拓展： Neither nor/ neither of / either or 3 It is a nice day , isn ‘t it ? What a nice day , isn ‘t it ?‎ 多么好的天气呀， 是吗？‎ 4 Friends like you make it easier to get along in a new place.‎ 有了你这样的朋友使我们在一个新地方会比较容易适应生活。‎ 5 I have a hard time finding it until yoou came along 在你出现之前，要找到它真是有点难。‎ ‎6It was because I could speak English that I got the job .‎ 正是因为我能讲英语，我找到了工作。‎ It is /was + 被强调的地方 + that 句子的其他成分 It was John that (who) broke the window yesterday.‎ 是约翰昨天打破了窗户。‎ It was yesterday that John broke the window .‎ 是昨天约翰打破了窗户 ‎1． I 基础知识 选择填空 ‎( ) 1 The Blacks many places of interest since they came to China A. will visit B. visited C. visit D. have visited ‎( ) 2 Alice has home for 2 weeks .‎ A. left B. been away C. been away from D. been ‎ from ( ) 3 –Are you a member of the club three years ago ?‎ ‎68‎ ‎- Yes, I the club three years ago .‎ A. join B. joined C. have joined D. was joined ‎( )4 ---I have never been to Hainan, but this summer I will have a chance to go there for vacation .‎ ‎- . I hope you can have a good time.‎ A. Me too B. Me neither C. So am I D Neither am I ( )5 The girl didn ‘t feel like .She was sick.‎ Aeat anything B eating anything C.to eat anything D ate anything ( ) 6I don ‘t think that the boy can solve the problem, ?‎ A. can he B. can ‘t he C. do you D. don ‘ytou ( ) 7-Your sister doesn ‘t like watching TV , does she ?‎ ‎- She prefers reading books to watching TV .‎ A. Yes, she does B. No, she doesn‘t C Yes, she doesn‘t DNo, she does ‎( )8 Would you like to tell youe trouble to your mother or yourfather ?‎ ‎-- . I usually keep it deep in my heart.‎ A Either B Neither C Both D none ( )9 Alice has home for 2 weeks .‎ A. left B. been away C. been away from D. been from ‎( )10--Lovely day, ? A isn ‘t it B is it C isn‘t that D aren ‘t they 句型转换 完成句子 ‎1He‘s already cleaned the classroom （变一般疑问句）‎ ‎ he the classroom ?‎ 2 His father can hardly write or read, ? （反意疑问句）‎ 3 The bag must be yours , ?（反意疑问句） 4My family have been to Qingdao a lot of times.‎ ‎ your family been to Qingdao?‎ ‎4(07 兰州 )Not only Tom but also Bob has been to that island.( 同义句转 换 ) Tom and Bob been to that island.‎ ‎5 这件外套你买了多长时间了？‎ ‎ have you the coat ? 6 这家工厂已经开业两年了。‎ The factory for two years 7 学生们应当学会怎样与他人相处 Students should learn how others.‎ ‎8 尽管迪斯尼巡游走的是不同路线，但都在同一个地点结束。‎ ‎well ‎ ‎ Disney Cruises different roads, they all the same place.‎ 适当形式填空 Come over, At least, look through, get along, look both ways, come along ‎1 Why not the newspaper for a new job? 2The meeting was too dull until the actor . 3 He has invited her four times.‎ ‎4Would you like if you are free?‎ ‎69‎ 5 How are you with your parents?‎ 6 You should be more careful when you cross the road.‎ 中考链接 ‎1.(08 滨州 )- Do you think we ‘ll need a coffee pot ?‎ - I don‘t drink coffee , and . It‘s not necessary . Why not a tea service ?‎ A. neither you do B. neither do you C. so you do D. so do you 2(07 贵阳 )-When did you buy these CDs ?-I them for two days. A .had B. have bought C. have had ‎3 (07 青岛 )I overslept this morning . my father my mother woke me up on time.‎ A. Either, orB. Both, and C. Neither, nor D. Not only, but also 4 (07 内蒙古 )The population of our city is becoming .‎ A. larger and larger B. more and more C. fewer and fewer D. less and less ‎5.(07 兰州 )Jimmy ‘s parents are teachers. Chinese , they both teach French..‎ ‎of them teaches A. Neither B. Either C. All D. Both ‎6(07 青岛 ) I prefer a small gift that has some thought behind it rather than some money.‎ A. to receive, to getting B receiving , getting C. to receive, get D. receiving , get ‎7If you him tomorrow, ask him if he to our party next week.‎ A. see, comes B. will see, comes C. will see, will come D. see, will come ‎8 He up early. But now he doesn ‘ t get up early.‎ A. is used get B. used to get C. was used to get D. used getting ‎9(07 青岛 )The old man had to do all the work himself, ?‎ A. did he, B. had he C. didn ‘t he D. hadn‘t he 10(07 济南 )-Your sister isn ‘t a nurse, is she?‎ - ‎ , she teaches English in a middle school.‎ A. No, she isn ‘t B. Yes, she is C. Yes, she isn‘t D. No, she 教 后 录 ‎70‎ 课时授课计划 授课日期 年 月 日 星期 ‎ 课 题 （第 课时）九年级 UNITS 1-2‎ 基础知识巩固 课时教学 目标 ‎基础练习巩固 重点和难 点 ‎中考链接 教学媒体 A tape recorder , CAI 时 间 基础知识巩固 I 词组 ‎教 师 活 动 设 计 学生活动 14) make mistakes 犯错 laugh at sb. 笑话；取笑（某人）‎ 15) make up 组成、构成 deal with 处理 16) regard as 把 看作为 . be terrified of sth. 害怕 17) make a decision 下决定 下决心 pay attention to sth. 对 注 意，留心 18) to one ‘ssurprise 令某人惊讶的是 take pride in sth. 以 而 自豪 19) get into trouble with 遇到麻烦 give up (doing) sth. 放弃 ‎(做 )某事 II 句型 1 ‎---How do you study for a test? 你如何准备考试？‎ ‎--- I study by working with friends. 我通过和朋友一起学习。‎ by + doing 通过 方式 2 What about reading aloud to practice pronunciation? 大声朗读练习发 音怎么样？‎ 提建议的句子：‎ ‎① What/ how about doing sth.? 造句：‎ ‎② Why don‘t you do sth.? 造句：‎ ‎③ Why not do sth. ? 造句：‎ ‎④ Let ‘s do sth. 造句：‎ ‎⑤ Shall we/I do sth.? 造句：‎ 3 First of all, it wasn‘t easy for me to understand the teacher when she talked to class. 首先，老师讲课时，我不容易听懂。‎ 划线部分同义句： wasn ‘t easy for me.‎ 扩展：同义句： I found .‎ ‎* 重点句型： It ’ s.(for sb. ) to do sth. ( 对某人来说 )做某事怎么样 4 Unless we deal with our problem, we can easily become unhappy. 我们很容易不开心，除非我们处理我们的问题。 用 if 改写：‎ ‎5 I used to be afraid of speaking in front of a group. 我过去害怕在众人 面前讲话。 一般疑问句： ‎ 易混淆词组：‎ ‎71‎ ‎1）used to be/do 过去 ‎2）be used to do = be used for doing 被用来 . 3）be/get used to (doing) 习惯于（做）‎ 6 It seems that Yu Mei has changed a lot. 于梅好像变化很大。 同义句： Yu Mei seems quite the past.‎ 7 She also told me that even though my father was no longer with us, he was watching me and would always take pride in everything good I do.‎ 她也告诉我，即使父亲不再和我们在一起了，他还在重视着我并会为 我做的每一件好事而自豪。‎ 改为直接引语并用同义词组替换： 注意：人称、时态的变化。‎ She also said to me, ―Even though father with us , he watching and always be everything ‎ do.‖‎ I 基础知识 ‎1 根据句意填入适当的词。‎ 1) He is very , because he likes talking and laughing.‎ 2) My father to be a teacher, but now he is a writer.‎ 3) He has a lot. Because he is different from the past.‎ 4) I am not afraid of the . I dare to go out.‎ 5) I often send and receive on the Internet. 2 词形填空 1) Most of us learn English by (study) our textbooks.‎ 2) Reading aloud can improve our (speak) skills.‎ 3) I am free now. What about (go) out for a walk?‎ 4) A good dictionary is (help) to your English-studying.‎ 5) Hearing they will see a moving, the students all got (excite).‎ 6) Don‘ t speak too (quick), we can ‘ t catch you.‎ ‎3 完成句子：‎ ‎1）该睡觉了。 It ‘s time to .‎ ‎2）我对画画感兴趣。 I drawing. 3）我非常喜欢咖啡，但我一点也不喜欢茶。‎ I like coffee , but I like tea . 4）她通过制作抽认卡来学习英语。‎ She learns English .‎ ‎5）我过去常常和奶奶聊天。 I my grandmother.‎ II 中考链接 ‎1）--- do you improve your listening?‎ ‎---I improve my listening watching English movies.‎ A. What, by B. How, by C. Where, on D. When, on 2）Usually we get about something and end up in Chinese.‎ A. exciting, speaking B. exciting, speak C. excited, speaking D. excited, speak 3）He‘ s been learning English five years.‎ A. in B. ago C. for D. since ‎4）-- I ‘ m worried, Jim. I don ‘ t know how writing.‎ ‎72‎ ‎--- Don‘ t worry! Why not a pen pal?‎ A. learn, to find B. learn, find C. to learn, find D. to learn, to find ‎5）If you him tomorrow, ask him if he to our party next week.‎ A. see, comes B. will see, comes C. will see, will come D. see, will come ‎6） He up early. But now he doesn ‘ t get up early.‎ A. is used get B. used to get C. was used to get D. used getting 1) He usually spends much time his lessons.‎ A. doing B. to do C. does D. did 2 翻译句子 ‎1) 我用电子邮件收发信件。‎ I use e-mails letters.‎ ‎2) 这声音听起来像铁轨发出的歌唱。‎ It the singing of rails.‎ ‎3) 步行回家得花我好长时间。‎ It me a long time home.‎ ‎4) 当他听到这消息时，任不住笑了起来。‎ When he heard the news, he .‎ ‎3 同义句转换 ‎1）He was a teacher in the past, but now he isn ‘ t.‎ He 2）It seemed that she has changed a lot ‎a teacher.‎ She to a lot.‎ 教 后 录 ‎73‎ 课时授课计划 授课日期 年 月 日 星期 ‎ 课 题 （第 课时）九年级 UNITS 3-4‎ 基础知识巩固 课时教学 目标 ‎基础练习巩固 重点和难 点 ‎中考链接 教学媒体 A tape recorder , CAI 时 间 基础知识巩固 I 词组 ‎教 师 活 动 设 计 学生活动 1) get their ears pierced 穿耳洞 be strict with sb. 对某人严厉 2) stay up 熬夜 get in the way of 碍事， 妨碍 3) concentrate on 全神贯注，专心于 care about 担心，关心 4) pretend to do sth. 假装做某事 get along with sb. 与 相处 5) let sb. down 让某人失望 come up with sth. 提出 想出 come out 出版，出来 II 句型 ‎1 I think sixteen-year-olds should be allowed to drive.‎ 我认为应该允许十六岁的孩子开车。‎ 改为主动语态： I think we should sixteen-year-olds . 2 They talk instead of doing homework. 他们不做作业，而是说话。 同义句： They homework, but they talk.‎ 用 instead of 翻译：昨天我们没打篮球，而是游泳了。‎ 3 We should be allowed to take time to do things like that more often.‎ 应该允许我们有时间更多地做那样的事情。‎ ‎“花时间做事情” 常用句型：It takes sb. time to do 并用 spend 改 写：‎ 4 What would you do if you had a million dollars? 如果你有一百万，你会用它做什么？ 虚拟语气句型：从句用过去时，主句用过去将来时。 1）如果我有时间，我就会去散步。‎ ‎2）假如我是你的话，我就穿衬衫戴领带。 5 What if everyone else brings a present?‎ 要是其他人都带了礼物该怎么办？‎ What if , ? 如果, 怎么办？‎ 6 You like talking to one or two rather than to a group.‎ 你喜欢跟一两个人说话，而不喜欢跟一群人说话。‎ rather than 还可以用在 prefer to do 后面，后接动词不定式 （ to 要省略） 翻译：我宁愿看书也不愿去购物。‎ 7 You would rather stay at home and read a book than go to a party.‎ 你宁愿呆在家里，也不愿去参加晚会。‎ ‎1）用 prefer doing to doing 句型改写：‎ ‎74‎ ‎2）用 prefer to do rather than 句型改写： 练习 I 基础知识 ‎1 翻译句子 ‎1）学生不应该穿耳眼。‎ Students shouldn ‘ t . 2）大声朗读对学英语很有好处。‎ Reading aloud is English. 3）我们不同意他的说法。‎ We didn ‘ t what he said.‎ ‎4）你查明了是谁把窗户打碎了吗？‎ Have you who broke the windows? 5）如果你中了五百万的彩票，你会做什么？‎ What would you do if you in the lottery?‎ ‎6）如果我是你的话，我会很紧张的。‎ If I you, I be . 7）你能想出其它办法解决这个问题吗？‎ Can you other ways to solve the question? 8）我宁愿去上海也不去海南。‎ I to Shanghai to Hainan. 9）他说与那个女孩相处很容易。‎ He said that it was very easy to the girl. 2 用所给动词的适当形式填空。‎ 1) Mr Brown will go fishing if it (not rain) tomorrow.‎ 2) I think he (be) back in a week.‎ 3) ‎-- your uncle (return) the video tapes to Mr Fox?‎ ‎--No. They ‘ re still in his bedroom.‎ 4) By the end of last term, they (work) there for ten years.‎ 5) Mr. Wang (read) a newspaper in the office at this time yesterday.‎ II 中考链接 ‎1 单项选择 ‎1） should not be allowed to go out at night.‎ A. Twelve-years-old B. Twelve-year-olds C. Twelve year old D. Twelve years olds ‎2） --- He went to see the man who was in hospital yesterday.‎ ‎--- .‎ A. So did we B. So we did C. We did so D. Did so we 3） present our vacations are too short.‎ A. At B. On C. From D. For 4） If he here, that would be ‎ good.‎ A. is B. was C. were D. has been 5）The man came to see you is my brother.‎ A. who B. whose C. which D. whom 6）I don ‘ t know he lives.‎ ‎75‎ A. what B. when C. where D. which 7） I don ‘ t know .‎ A. what to do it B. how to do it C. what to do D. to do what 8）He is too tired any longer.‎ A. not to walk B. to walk C. walking D. not walking 9）He is afraid to speak in public.‎ A. the B a C. an D. /‎ ‎10) Don ‘t worry. You plenty of time to decide.‎ A will B have given C will be given D are giving 2 句型转换 ‎1）Parents should allow their children to play basketball on Sundays.( 改为 被动语态 )‎ Children Sundays.‎ ‎2）her hair was cut last Sunday. （改为同义句）‎ She her hair last Sunday.‎ ‎play basketball on ‎3）The math problem is so difficult that we can ‘t work it out. （改为简单 句）‎ The math problem is difficult us work it out.‎ 教 后 录 ‎76‎ 课时授课计划 授课日期 年 月 日 星期 ‎ 课 题 （第 课时）九年级 UNITS 5-6‎ 基础知识巩固 课时教学 目标 ‎基础练习巩固 重点和难 点 ‎中考链接 教学媒体 A tape recorder , CAI 时 间 基础知识巩固 I 词组 ‎教 师 活 动 设 计 学生活动 20) belong to 属于 make up 形成；组成；构成 21) use up 用完；用光；耗尽 turn off 关掉 22) on display 展览；陈列 suit sb. (fine) （很）合某人的意；对 某人（很）合适 23) to be honest 老实说；说实在的 be bad for 对 有害 24) stay away from 与 保持距离 be in agreement 意见一致 II 句型 1 It must belong to Carla. 它一定属于 Carla.‎ 同义句： It must .‎ 2 It‘s crucial that I study for it because it makes up 30% of the final exam. 我复习准备这次考试很重要，因为它占期末考试成绩的 30% 本句含有主语从句，请把它放在句首改写：‎ ‎ is crucial because .‎ 3 There must be something visiting the homes in our neighborhood. 一定 有什么东西光顾我们的左邻右舍。‎ 同 义 句 ： Something must neighborhood.‎ 提示 : there be sth. doing = Sth. be doing ..‎ ‎the homes in our 例如： There is a boy playing outside. = A boy is playing outside.‎ 4 I listened to one called Heart Strings. 我听了一首名为 《心弦》的歌曲。 called Heart Strings. 过去分词短语做定语。 过去分词短语作定语，可以在前面加上关系代词，分词前加上 be, 即 可构成含有定语从句的复合句。请尝试把本句改为复合句：‎ I listened to one called Heart Strings. 注：这样便于理解为什么用过去分词：表示被动含义。 拓展：请分析这两句话：它们的意思一样吗？‎ 1) Do you know the boy ( who is) calling Tom?‎ 2) Do you know the boy (who is) called Tom?‎ 5 Whatever you do, don ‘t miss the exhibition. 无论你干什么，都不要错 过这次展览。‎ whatever you do = you do ‎77‎ 1 I like groups that wear really cool clothes. 我喜欢穿的很酷的组合。 本句含有定语从句，关系代词 that 做从句的主语。请思考：为什么 wear 不加 -s ?‎ 练习 I 基础知识 ‎1 用情态动词 must, may , might, could, can 填空 ‘t 1) The dictionary be mine. It has my name on it.‎ 2) The CD belong to Tony because he likes listening to pop music.‎ 3) The hair band be Bob ‘ s. After all, he is boy! 2 选择正确单词填空。‎ during, appointment, anxious, attempt, might, too many, symphony, crucial 1) The prisoners to escape, but failed.‎ 2) I have an at 3 p.m.‎ 3) There are extra trains to the seaside the summer.‎ 4) I ‘ m very about my son ‘ s health.‎ 5) There would be people in the hall.‎ 6) Getting this contract is to the future of our company.‎ 7) If you have any idea where it be, please call me. 3 按照要求写句子。‎ ‎1）Albert found the key. I lost the key yesterday. （合成一句）‎ 2) Where is the beautiful picture? You bought it last week. （合成一句）‎ 3) She was ill, but she still went on working. （同义句）‎ ‎ she was ill, she still went on working.‎ 4) I think that it is important to master a foreign language. ( 同义句）‎ I think a foreign language.‎ 5) Mother didn ‘ t do the work for her little son, but taught him how to do it. (同义句）‎ Instead of for her little son, she taught him how to do it.‎ ‎4 完成句子。‎ ‎1) Tom 在这场篮球赛中表现出色。‎ Tom in this basketball match. 2) 她喜欢能够一起舞起来的快歌。‎ She likes music . 3) 王叔叔教我们如何修自行车。‎ Uncle Wang teaches us . 4) 这幢建筑使我想起了我的母校。‎ This building . 5)这顶帽子非常适合您，女士！‎ This hat , madam!‎ II 中考链接 ‎1 选择 ‎78‎ 1) I prefer watching TV to music every day.‎ A. listen to B. listen C. listening to D. listening 2) Do you know what ?‎ A. his favourite song is B. is his favourite song C. his favourite song D. his most favourite song is 3) Mary sings English songs well and .‎ A. Jane does too B. either does Joes C. so Janes does D. so does Jane 4) What do you think of the football match?‎ A. How do you think of B. How do you like C. What do you think D. What do you like 5) This question is easy, all the students can answer it.‎ A. too much B. too many C. much too D. many too 6) He would do great thins should not attempt them all alone.‎ A. whom B. who C. whose D. which 2 句型转换 (同义句 )。‎ 1) The bench was so long that all of us were able to sit on it.‎ The bench was long enough all of us .‎ 2) Mary spent three thousand yuan on the color TV set. The color TV set three thousand yuan.‎ 3) I don ‘ t know either Russian or French.‎ I know Russian French.‎ 4) The mother told her son, ― Don‘ t read in the bed. ‖‎ The mother her son read in the bed.‎ 5) They prefer this kind of fruit to that kind.‎ They like this kind of fruit that kind.‎ 6) I didn ‘ t know how I could repair the bike. I didn ‘ t know repair the bike.‎ 教 后 录 ‎79‎ 课时授课计划 授课日期 年 月 日 星期 ‎ 课 题 （第 课时）九年级 UNITS 7-8‎ 基础知识巩固 课时教学 目标 ‎基础练习巩固 重点和难 点 ‎中考链接 教学媒体 A tape recorder , CAI 时 间 基础知识巩固 I 词组 ‎教 师 活 动 设 计 学生活动 25) take it easy 从容；轻松；不紧张 as soon as possible 尽快地 26) be willing to 乐意（做某事） quite a few 相当多；不少 27) hold on to 继续；坚持；保持 clean up （把 ）打扫干 净 /收拾整齐 28) cheer up 使振奋；使高兴起来 give out / hand out 分发； 发放 ‎29) put off 推迟；拖延 set up 建立；创立；开办 ‎30) take after 与 想像 put up 张贴；搭建 ‎31) ask for 要；要求；请求 work out 产生结果；发展； 成功 ‎32) help sb. out 帮助（某人）解决困难 II 句型 1 Where would you like to go on vacation ？你想去哪儿度假？‎ would like/love to = to do 注意：“ Would you like to ?‖表示邀请，回答时要注意礼貌。 请给出回答： Would you like to come to my party? 肯定回答： 否 定回答：‎ 2 For your next vacation, why not consider visiting Paris? 下一次假期为 么不考虑去巴黎呢？‎ ‎* Why not do 相当于 Why don ‘ yt ou do ，表示 ―为什么不 ?‖，常用 来向别人提建议。‎ What about making our teacher a card? ( 同义句 ) Why our teacher a card?‎ ‎* consider 考―虑，细想 ‖，相当于 think about ，后面接动词时，应用动 词的 -ing 形式。 后面动词必须用动名词形式的动词还有：‎ ‎ ; ; ; ; ‎ ‎2 Unless you speak French yourself, it ‘s best to travel with someone who can translate things for you. 如果你自己不讲法语，旅游时最好带上能 给你翻译的人。‎ 请改写本句。提示： unless = if not; it ‘s best to do = you‘d better do If , travel with ‎80‎ someone who can translate things for you.‎ 1 Not only do I feel good about helping other people, but I get to spend time doing what I love to do. 我不仅对帮助别人感到很满足，而且我还 渐渐地花时间做自己喜爱做的事情。‎ not only ... but also (also 可省略 )置于句首时， not only 后面从句的主谓 要倒装。‎ 翻译：他不仅去过加拿大，而且还认识许多加拿大人。‎ 2 The strategies that he came up with worked out fine. 他想的那些办法 获得了成功。‎ Work out 还有其他用法：计算出；解答 翻译句子：这道题太难了，没有人能算出来。‎ The problem is so difficult that nobody can .‎ 3 ‎.who has filled my life with pleasure. 使我生活充满快乐的人 fill with “用 装 ” 翻译：请把瓶子装上水。 ‎ 注意：被动语态 be filled with 表状态。相等于 be full of 练习 I 基础知识 ‎1 用所给动词的适当形式填空。‎ 1) I ‘ m sorry (say) that there ‘ s no_th_i_n_g (_e_at).‎ 2) It is ten years since I (leave) my hometown.‎ 3) You need something (drink), don 4) Either he or I (be) right.‎ 5) No (smoke) in the hospital, please.‎ 6) What color do you decide (buy)? 2 完成句子。‎ ‎1) 我希望将来有一天我能梦想成真。‎ I hope my dream . 2) 这家公司会为我们公司提供免费的饮料。‎ ‎u‘? t yo This company will our company free drinks. 3) 这位女士是交换项目中的一位成员。‎ The lady is on an . 4) 我正考虑换一份新工作。‎ I am a new job. 5) 在那个岛上没什么可做。‎ ‎ on the island.‎ ‎6) 我准备领他去看电影，以便他会高兴起来。‎ I am going to take him to the cinema . 7) 你知道谁在校门口分发广告了吗？‎ Do you know who at the school gate? 8) 他们的老师不但会讲英语，而且还会讲日语。‎ Their teacher can speak English Japanese. 9) 没人想买这些大衣，甚至白送也不要。‎ No one wants to buy these coats. You can 10) 刚刚离开的那列火车是开往鸡西的。‎ ‎even ‘t .‎ ‎81‎ The train is for Jixi.‎ II 中考链接 ‎1 选择 1) My parents want to go on vacation.‎ A. somewhere peaceful B. dangerous somewhere C. somewhere boring D. fascinating somewhere 2) They -- all over the country. So they plan - some other country.‎ A. have traveled, visit B. traveled, to visit C. traveled, visiting D. have traveled, to travel 3) Some robots are to do the same things people.‎ A. enough smart, as B. enough smart, with C. smart enough, as D. smart enough, for 4) ‎--- Must I go out for a walk now? --- No, you .‎ A. mustn ‘ t B. can ‘ t C. needn ‘ t D. may not 5) Did you much money on the car?‎ A. cost B. pay C. spend D. take 8. The boss in the factory often makes the workers nine hours a day.‎ A. work B. to work C. working D. worked 2 句型转换：改为同义句 ‎1) It took some students too much time to play computer games. Some students too much time computer games. 2）People don ‘ t feel like doing simple jobs over and over again.‎ People do simple jobs over and over again.‎ ‎3）To work in a school is very interesting.‎ ‎ very interesting to work in a school.‎ ‎4) Jim looks like his elder brother.‎ Jim his elder brother.‎ 教 后 录 ‎82‎ 课时授课计划 授课日期 年 月 日 星期 ‎ 课 题 （第 课时）九年级 UNITS 9-10‎ 基础知识巩固 课时教学 目标 ‎基础练习巩固 重点和难 点 ‎中考链接 教学媒体 A tape recorder , CAI 时 间 基础知识巩固 I 词组 33) be used for 用来做 34) by accident 错误地 ‎教 师 活 动 设 计 学生活动 ‎35) according to 根据；按照；据 所说；视 而定 36) fall into 落入；陷入 37) knock into 与 相撞 38) go off 发出响声 ‎39) run off 跑掉；迅速离开 40) break down 停止运转；出现故障 41) show up 出席；露面 42) set off 激起；引起 43) sell out 卖完；售光 44) get married 结婚 II 句型 1 They‘re used for seeing in the dark. 他们被用来在黑暗中照明。‎ be used for doing = be used to do 改写本句： ‎ 但是注意以下短语的含义，并分别造句：‎ get/be used to doing 习惯于做某事 used to do 过去常常 2 George Crum cooked them for a long time until they were crispy. George Crum 将它们炸了很久，直到它们变脆。‎ ‎◎在肯定句中， until 与延续性动词连用，表示 ―直到 为止 ‖。‎ I late in the afternoon. 我一直干到下午很晚。‎ ‎◎在否定句中， until 常与短暂性动词连用，表示 ―直到 才 ‖。‎ The rain until midnight. 雨直到半夜才停。‎ 3 Dr Naismith divided the men in his class into two teams, and taught them how to play his new game.‎ Naismith 医生把他的学生分成两组，并教他们如何玩他的新游戏。‎ 改为被动语态：‎ ‎83‎ The men in his class two teams, and ‎ ‎ how to play his new game.‎ 1 By the time I woke up, my father had already gone into the bathroom and I had to wait for him to come out.‎ 到我醒来的时候，我父亲已经进去洗澡了，我只好等他出来。‎ by the time 到 时候。 翻译：今天早晨我起床的时候，妈妈已经做好早饭了。‎ ‎ .‎ 2 Welles was so convincing that hundreds of people believed the story. Welles 的话是如此具有说服力，以至于成百上千人相信了他的话。 本句中 that 从句是肯定式，可以和 enough for sb to do sth 转换。 改写本句： ‎ ‎◎ that 从句是否定式时，常用 too...to... 转换 The little girl was so tired that she couldn ‘ t walk farther.‎ ‎=The little girl walk farther.‎ 3 She was thrilled, because she really wanted to get married.‎ 她很激动，因为她真的想结婚。‎ ‎◎ get married 表示动作； be married 表示状态 你能完成下面的同义句吗？‎ Lucy married Robert two years ago.‎ ‎= Lucy has been Robert for two years.‎ ‎=It is two years since Lucy and Robert .‎ ‎=Two years since Lucy married Robert.‎ ‎◎问对方 ―婚否 ‖时，应说 ?‎ 练习 I 基础知识 ‎1 用所给动词的正确形式填空。‎ 1) By the time we got home, my mother (go) out for a walk.‎ 2) His father was ill. He had to (stay) at home today.‎ 3) ‎ you ever (see) that man over there, Alice?‎ 4) Don‘ t forget (close) the windows when you leave your room.‎ 5) The young man asked the girl (marry) him.‎ 6) English (speak) in the world widely. 2 完成句子 ‎1) 我想每天给你们更多的时间学习和休息。‎ I want to give you to study and rest. 2) 直到手术后他才回家。‎ He go home the operation was over. 3)我今天想休息，不想工作。‎ I have a rest work today. 4) 他跑得不够快，没能赶上公共汽车。‎ He didn ‘ t run to catch the bus.‎ II 中考链接 ‎84‎ ‎1 选择 1) He is very kind, and he ‘ d lpike to h_e_l people.‎ A. rich B. homeless C. happy D. clever 2) He has realized that he his wallet in the shop.‎ A. left B. forgot C. borrowed D. sold ‎3)I went to bed at eight thirty, but they stayed till twelve o ‘ clock.‎ A. away B. in C. out D. up 4) What is a telephone used , class?‎ A. to B. in C. for D. about 5) Can you tell me the train was invented?‎ A. what B. who C. when D. which 6) I think the invention is a mobile phone. What about you?‎ A. helpful B. more helpful C. helpfulest D. most helpful 7) He took my English-Chinese dictionary mistake.‎ A. to B. by C. about D. on 8) The man is made some extra hours.‎ A. work B. to work C. worked D. working 9) ‎ , where is the post office near here ？‎ A. In the way B. On the way C. By the way D. In this way 10) This is my new pen. It me 18 yuan.‎ A. cost B. spent C. paid D. took 11) Our classroom every day, so it ‘ s very clean.‎ A. cleans B. is cleaning C. is cleaned D. cleaned 2 句型转换：同义句 ‎1）I don ‘ t like this shirt because it is too thin for me.‎ I wearing this shirt because it isn ‘ t for me.‎ 2. To understand what he is saying is too difficult.‎ ‎ too difficult to understand what he is saying.‎ 3. What ‘ s the populationCohf ina?‎ ‎ is the number of people in china?‎ 教 后 录 ‎85‎ 课时授课计划 授课日期 年 月 日 星期 ‎ 课 题 （第 课时）九年级 UNITS 11-12‎ 基础知识巩固 课时教学 目标 ‎基础练习巩固 重点和难 点 ‎中考链接 教学媒体 A tape recorder , CAI 时 间 基础知识巩固 I 词组 ‎教 师 活 动 设 计 学生活动 45) dress up 穿上盛装；装扮 46) hand in 交上；递交 47) go past 越过；绕过 48) be supposed to do 应该；被期望 ‎49) drop by 顺便（或偶然）拜访 50) after all 毕竟；终究；究竟 51) make a noise 发出令人不愉快的声音 52) go out of one ‘s way to do sth. 特地（不怕麻烦地）做某事 53) make sb. feel at home 使某人感到宾至如归 54) be/get used to 习惯于 55) learn by oneself 自学 II 句型 1 Could you please tell me where the restrooms are? 请问洗手间在哪 里？‎ 英语中表达问路或处所的句式有不少，请完成下列同义句：‎ Excuse me. Could you tell me to the restrooms? Excuse me. Could you tell me how get to the restrooms? Excuse me. Could you tell me how get to the restrooms?‎ Excuse me. the way to the restrooms, please?‎ Excuse me. the restrooms, please?‎ Excuse me. How get to the restrooms, please?‎ 2 They have organized games and the staff dressed up as clowns.‎ 他们组织游戏活动，工作人员打扮成小丑的模样。‎ ‎◎ dress及物动词， 后面不用表示衣服的名词作宾语， 但可用指人的名 词或代词作宾语，表示给某人穿衣服。‎ 翻译：她很快给孩子们穿上衣服。 She ‎ ‎◎ get dressed―穿上衣服 ‖。 = one ’s clothes ‎◎ dress up 化―装 ‖， ―穿上盛装 ‖， ―打扮 ‖‎ dress up as 打扮成 .‎ 翻译：他们都打扮成解放军的模样。‎ They all PLA men.‎ ‎86‎ 1 You‘ re not supposed to make noise while eating noodles.‎ 吃面条的时候你不应该弄出响声来。‎ be supposed to = should while eating noodles 是 while 从句的省略形式。 改写本句：‎ You make noise while eating noodles.‎ 2 Although I still make lots of mistakes, it doesn ‘ t bother me like it used to. 虽然我还是出了不少错，但它不像以前那样让我烦恼。‎ mistake 错―误 ‖， ―过失 ‖，可数名词。常与 make 连用 例句： Anyone can make a mistake. 人人都会犯错误。 补充：词组 by mistake ‎ 3 I find it difficult to remember everything, but I ‘ m gradually getting used to things, and don ‘ t find them so strange any more. 我发现将这一切全记住很难，但慢慢就对这些东西习惯了，也就不再 觉得它们很怪异了。‎ ‎1）I find it difficult to remember everything. 改为复合句 I find (that) difficult to remember everything.‎ ‎2）get/be used to sth/doing(sth) 习惯于 ‖―‎ be used to do 被用―来 ‖‎ used to do “过去常常 ”‎ 4 Your teachers will not be pleased if you write e-mail English in a test!‎ 如果你在测试中用电子邮件英语老师会不高兴的。‎ 用 unless 改写： .‎ 练习 I 基础知识： 完成句子 ‎1. 晚会上我通常是喝茶而不是喝咖啡。‎ I often at the party. 2. 虽然她不再年轻了，但她有一颗年轻的心。‎ Though , she has a young heart. 3. 坐电梯到二楼，银行就在书店旁边。‎ ‎ the second floor, the bank is bookstore.‎ ‎4. 体育和音乐相比，我更喜欢音乐。‎ I . 5. 微机室不许吸烟。‎ Smoking in the computer room. 6. 中国以它的特殊文化而闻名。‎ China its special culture. 7. 吃饭时不要用筷子指着别人。‎ Don‘ t others with chopsticks while eating. 8. 他们特意让我感觉自然些。‎ They to .‎ II 中考链接 ‎1 选择 ‎‎ the ‎87‎ 1) They many happy hours along the beach during that holiday.‎ A. spend, walking B. spent, walking C. cost , walking D. gave, walking 2) Which one has the same meaning as ― Take your time ‖?‎ A. Take it easy B. No hurry C. Hurry up D. Be quick 3) Can you tell me ?‎ A. how much does it cost B. how much it is C. how much it costs D. Both B and C 4) I feel after a good sleep.‎ A. relaxation B. relaxed C. relaxes D. relaxs 5) ‎---- Will you come to the dinner party?‎ ‎---- I won ‘ t come until Jenny .‎ A. will be invited B. can be invited C. invited D. is invited 6) It ‘ s too hot. Do you mind the window?‎ A. my closing B. my opening C. open D. close 7) She Shanghai next week.‎ A, is leaving for B. leaves for C. leaved D. left 8) Yang Liwei is proud his motherland.‎ A. in B. of C. from D. for 9) He in his English Test Paper. His teacher was very angry with him.‎ A. makes some mistakes B. make a mistake C.made few mistakes D. made many mistakes 2 句型转换 1) Are there any public restrooms around here? Could you tell me? （合并）‎ Could you tell me if any public restrooms here?‎ 2) Should I shake hands or kiss? (同义句 )‎ Am I shake hands or kiss?‎ 3) He can‘t come to the party today. I think.( 合并 )‎ I think he come to the party today.‎ 4) Lily spent more than two hundred yuan buying this T-shirt. （同义句）‎ This T-shirt Lily two hundred yuan.‎ ‎5 The child is too young to put on clothes himself. （同义句）‎ ‎ too difficult for the child to himself.‎ 教 后 录 ‎88‎ 课时授课计划 授课日期 年 月 日 星期 ‎ 课 题 （第 课时）九年级 UNITS 13-15‎ 基础知识巩固 课时教学 目标 ‎基础练习巩固 重点和难 点 ‎中考链接 教学媒体 A tape recorder , CAI 时 间 基础知识巩固 I 词组 56) aim at 瞄准；针对 ‎教 师 活 动 设 计 学生活动 57) for instance 例如；比如 58) at times 有时；偶尔 59) to start with 首先 60) clean out 清除；把 打扫干净 61) get back to sb. 过一会再与某人通话 62) be off 离开；走开 63) so far 到目前为止 64) thanks to 幸亏；由于；因为 65) look forward to 盼望；期待 ‎66) care for 关心；关怀；照顾 II 句型 1. Rainy days make me sad. 阴雨天让我难受。‎ 2. It makes me want to join a clean-up campaign. 这让我想加入一次清 扫大运动。‎ ‎★ make 的用法 ‎1) make sb./sth. + adj.‎ ‎2) make sb. / sth. + do 使某人做某事（不带 to） 造句：‎ ‎★注意：被动语态时，必须带不定式符号 to.‎ 句型 2 用被动语态改写：‎ I want to join a clean-up campain.‎ 3. For instance ， they can help you to compare two different products so that you can buy the one you really need. 例如，他们可以帮你比较两个 不同的产品，以便你可以买到你确实需要的。‎ ‎1)for instance = ‎ ‎2)so that 为了，以便，引导目的状语从句 造句：‎ ‎★注意： so that 常用来引导结果状语从句 ‎89‎ 1. In the past twelve months, they ‘ ve had three majonrdcomnacdeertsaa hit CD. 在过去的十二个月里， 他们举办了三场较大的音乐会， 出版了 一张很受欢迎的 CD 唱片。‎ ‎1）― in the pas/ltast+时间段 ‖常用于现在完成时的句子中。‎ ‎2）短语 make a hit 表示 ―大获成功 ‖、 ―（演出等）大受欢迎；受到赞 扬 ‖‎ 翻译：他的歌曲轰动一时。 His song was .‎ 2. The walls are made from old glass bottles that are glued together.‎ 墙是由旧玻璃瓶粘在一起建成的。‎ be made from/of 意为 ―由 （原料）制成 ‖‎ be made from 看不出原材料是什么；‎ be made of 可看得出原材料 补充： be made up of 表示由一种种成分或一个个成员组成。 完成句子：‎ ‎1)葡萄酒是由葡萄制成的。 Wine grapes. 2)这桌子是由木头做的。 The desk wood. 3)电视机是由数百个不同的零件组装成的。‎ A TV set is hundreds of different parts.‎ 练习 I 基础知识 ‎1 翻译短语 1) put on ‎ ‎‎ put up ‎ ‎‎ put off put down put away 2) turn on turn up ‎ 3) the number of ‎ 4) have been to ‎ ‎turn off turn down ‎ a number of have gone to ‎ have been in Jinan for two weeks 2 词形填空 ‎1）Here are some things they have learned from (scientist ) studies.‎ ‎2）Sunglasses are used for (keep) out the sun.‎ ‎3）The students are (confuse) about the (confuse) problem.‎ ‎4）I ‘mconsidering (study) in Beijing or Shanghai.‎ ‎5）I felt (embarrass) when everyone looked at me.‎ ‎6）The old building (set up) yesterday.‎ ‎7）Young people should speak to old (polite).‎ ‎8）Most of the trash can (recycle) in the future.‎ ‎9）There (use) to be a lot of manatees.‎ ‎10）As soon as he saw me, He stopped (speak) to me.‎ ‎11） When the teacher came in, the students stopped 12）They (not come) back yet.‎ ‎3 完成句子 ‎1)他很聪明 ,知道如何赚更多的钱。‎ ‎(talk).‎ ‎90‎ He is very clever and he knows . 2)我不喜欢阴雨天 , 因为它常常使我伤感。‎ I don‘t like , because it often . 3)学生应该学会如何学习 ,否则你会觉得压力太大。‎ Students should learn , or you will . 4)我把钥匙忘在家了。‎ I home. 5)那天我起的很早以便能赶上第一班火车。‎ That day I got up early . 6)他假装没听见我说话 ,继续听音乐。‎ He and went on listening to music. 7)这个教室有 10 米长， 6 米宽。‎ The classroom is . 8)离开房间时不要忘记关灯。‎ Don ‘t forget when you leave the room.‎ II 中考链接 ‎1 选择 1) Loud music may make people fast.‎ A. to eat B. eat C. eated D. eats 2) The children were made homework first.‎ A. do B. to do C. did D. doing 3)----How many students are there in your school ?‎ ‎---- the students in our school over two thousand .‎ A. The number of , is B. The number of , are C. A number of , is 4) Hurry up ! The play for ten minutes .‎ A. has begun B. had begun C. has been on D. began 5) When they were young , they around from place to place .‎ A. used to travelling B.used to travel C. were used to travel D.are used to travelling 6) ‎ have you been in China?‎ A. How long B. How often C. How soon D. How far 7) At last, Lucy made the baby and the baby began to laugh.‎ A. stop crying B. to stop crying C. stop to say D. to stop to cry 教 后 录 ‎91‎ 课时授课计划 授课日期 年 月 日 星期 ‎ 课 题 （第 课时） 初中英语复习专辑（ 1） —— 名词 基础知识巩固：可数名词和不可数名词的熟记 课时教学 目标 ‎基础练习巩固 重点和难 点 ‎中考链接，名词所有格的运用 ，不可数名词的熟悉运用 教学媒体 A tape recorder , CAI 时 间 名词的数 ‎1、可数名词与不可数名词 ‎教 师 活 动 设 计 学生活动 A、不可数名词，初中阶段常见的不可数名词有： water ; meat ; rice ; bread ; milk ; tea ; orange(桔汁 ) ; fruit ; air ; snow ; chalk; work ; paper(纸 ) ; time( 时间 ); music ; weather ; grass ; news ; food ; fish( 鱼肉 ); coke ; porridge ; cake( 可数或不可数 ). 不可数名词应注意以下几点： 1)前无数、冠，后无复数；作主语为三单 .‎ ‎2)表量用约数 some /any ; much ; a lot of 或用 of 短语 eg. There is bread on the table. [C]‎ A. a B. one C. a piece of D. many There is some on the plate. [B]‎ A. apple B. fish C. milks D. deer 2、可数名词的复数 A、不规则变化：‎ man— men ; woman— women ;child — children policeman— policemen Englishman— Englishmen Frenchman— Frenchmen foot— feet ; tooth — teeth mouse(鼠 )— mice B、规则变化 ‎1） s; sh; ch; x 结尾加 es 读 [iz]‎ ‎2) ce; se; ze; (d)ge 结尾加 s eg. boxes [b ksiz] blouses [blauz iz]‎ ‎3)f (fe) 结尾则变 f(fe) 为 v 加 es---读 [vz] eg. kniv es [naivz ]‎ ‎4) 辅―+y ‖结尾变 y 为 i 加 es 清就清 [s]‎ ‎5)一般加 s 浊就浊 [z]‎ eg. books[buk s] pens[penz] babies[beibi z]‎ 但注意以下几点：‎ ‎① potato— potatoes ; tomato— tomatoes ‎② 单复同形 : fish ; sheep ; deer ; Chinese ; Japanese ‎③ 由 man , woman 在词首构成的复合名词应将两部分都变成复数 man doctor — men doctors ‎④ reef— reefs ‎92‎ ‎⑤ “ 某国人”的复数：中日不变英法 变，其余 s 加后面 . eg. German— Germans ‎⑥ people , police 常用单数形式表示复数概念 The police are looking for the missing boy.‎ ‎3、名词所有格：名词 ‘ s意(思是 ―,, 的 ‖) A. 有生命的名词所有格，一般在后加 “‘”s但注意 ： 1)表两者共有则在后者加“ ‘”s Lucy and Lily ‘ s fa露the西r 和莉莉的父亲 Lucy ‘ s and Lily ‘ s 露fat西he的rs父亲和莉莉的父亲 . 2)以 s 结尾的词只加“ ‘”‎ eg. 1) the boys ‘ b2o)oJkasmes ‘ father 3)无生命的名词所有格用 of 来引导 eg. the leg of the desk ‎4)双重所有格： a friend of my father ‘s a friend of mine ( √ ) a friend of my( × )‎ 练 习 一、写出下列 词．的复数 1. book 2.bus 3.orange 4.baby 5.boy 6.my 7.his 8.knife 9.watch 10.sheep 11. tooth 12. leaf 13.German 14.Chinese ‎ 二、选择正确的答案 ‎( )1.— Are those ?‎ ‎--- No, they aren ‘ t. They ‘ re .‎ A. sheep ; cows B. sheep ; cow C. sheeps ; cow D. sheeps ; cows ‎( )2.Mum, I ‘ m quite thirsty. Please give me .‎ A. two orange B. two bottles of orange C. two bottles orange D. two bottles of oranges ‎( )3.I have got news from my friend. Do you want to know?‎ A. a very good B. any C. a piece of D. two pieces ( )4. room is on the 5th floor.‎ A. Lucy and Lily B. Lucy and Lily ‘s C. Lucy ‘ s and Lily D. Lucy ‘ s and Lily ‘s ‎( )5.Every morning Mr. Smith takes a to his office.‎ A. 20 minutes ‘ walk B. 20 minute ‘ s walk C. 20-minutes walk D. 20-minute walk ‎( )6.This is James Allan Green. We can call him .‎ A. Mr. Green B. Mr. Allan C. Mr. James D. James Green ( )7.Jack and Tom are .‎ A. good friends B. good friend ‎93‎ C. a good friend D. good a friend ‎( )8.It ‘ s only about ten walk to the nearest post office.‎ A. minutes B. minute ‘ s C. minutes ‘ D. minute ( )9.He often has for breakfast.‎ A. two breads B. two piece of breads C. two pieces of bread D. two pieces of breads ‎( )10.Mrs. Green has two . They ‘ re very bright.‎ A. childs B. child C. children ‘ s D. children ‎( )11.What did the headmaster say about Jim ‘ s .‎ A. two months holiday B. two months ‘ holiday C. two-month hol iday D. two month ‘ s holidays ‎( )12.I won ‘ t go there with you, for I have a lot of to do.‎ A. works B. job C. work D. working ( )13.Li Lei is a friend of .‎ A. I sister B. my sister ‘ s C. me sister D. my sister of ( )14.Have you read ?‎ A. today ‘ s B. today paper C. the today ‘ s papDe.r today ‘ s paper ( )15.How many are there in the room?‎ A. boxes B. box C. boxs D. boxxes ‎( )16.Many have been built in our city since 1987.‎ A. factorys B. factories C. factoryes D. factorys ‎( )17.There are lots of in the basket on the table .‎ A. tomatos B. tomato C. tomatoes D. tomatoss ( )18.The cat caught two last night.‎ A. mouses B. mice C. mouse D. mices ‎( )19.Jack went to have two pulled out yesterday afternoon.‎ A. tooths B. tooth C. teeth D. toothes ( )20.In our school there are fifty-five .‎ A. women teachers B. woman teachers C. women teacher D. woman ‘ s teacher ( )21.The three will be put into prison.‎ A. thiefs B. thief C. thieves D. thiefs ‘‎ 教 后 录 ‎94‎ 课时授课计划 授课日期 年 月 日 星期 ‎ 课 题 （第 课时） 初中英语复习专辑（ 2） —— 冠词 基础知识巩固 a ,an the 的灵活运用 课时教学 目标 ‎基础练习巩固 重点和难 点 ‎中考链接 零冠词的用法 教学媒体 A tape recorder , CAI 时 间 ‎1、不定冠词 a, an ‎教 师 活 动 设 计 学生活动 a 用在辅音音素开头的词前 eg. a book a useful book a ―u‖‎ ‎[ j u:sful] [ ju:]‎ an 用于元音开头的词前 . eg. an apple an hour an ― F‖‎ ‎[au ] [ef]‎ ‎2、定冠词 the 1)特指某人 /某物 The book on the desk is mine. 2)世上独一无二的事物前 the sun , the moon, the earth, the sky 3)形、副最高级及序数词前 The third boy is the tallest of all. (但当这些词前已有其他限定词，如物主代词、所有格、指示代词时， 则不能再用 the)‎ He is my first English teacher.‎ ‎4)the + 姓的复数表示 “某家人”或“某夫妇” 。 the Greens 格林一家 ‎/ 格林夫妇 ‎3、不用冠词的几种情况：‎ ‎1)在星期、月份、季节前不用冠词 ‎2)学科名词前 ‎3)球类运动及早、 中、晚三餐名词前 （但： ①当三餐名词前有修饰词时， 则要加适当的冠词 .‎ ‎②表乐曲演奏的名词前应加 the）‎ 1) He went to school after he had a quick breakfast.‎ 2) play the violin / piano ‎4 ） 某些习惯语中不用冠词 例： go to school 上学 at home 在家 on time 准时 at last 终于 ‎go to bed 上床睡觉 in time 按时 at first 起初 lose heart 灰心 ‎95‎ in fact 事实上 on holiday 在度假 on duty 值日 at times 有时候 after class 课后 at night 在夜间 by bus 乘公交车 by sea 乘船，走海路 with pleasure 乐意地 with anger 生气地 with kindness 亲切地 ‎on foot 步行 at work 在工作 on show 在展出 in trouble 处于困境 on fire 着火 stay at home 呆在家里 by air 乘飞机 by land 走陆路，由陆路 with joy 高兴地 with difficulty 吃力地 练 习 ‎( )1.There is ― s‖ in word ― bus ‖.‎ A. a ; a B. an ; the C. a ; the D. an ; a ‎( )2.Maths is useful subject. You can ‘ t drop it , I think.‎ A. an B. a C. the D. / ( )3. bad weather it is!‎ A. How B. What a C. How a D. What ( )4.— What color is orange?‎ ‎-- It ‘ s orange.‎ A. an; an B. an ; the C. an ; / D. / ; an ( )5.Mr. Li is old worker.‎ A. an B. a C. some D. /‎ ‎( )6.Look at pi cture! There ‘ s house in it.‎ A. a ; a B. the ; the C. a ; the D. the; a ‎( )7.One morning he found handbag. There was corner of handbag.‎ A. a ; an ; the B. a ; a ; the C. a ; a ; a D. the ; an ; a ( )8.What interesting story it is!‎ A. a B. an C. the D. /‎ ‎( )9.Meimei is best student in her class.‎ A. a B. an C. / D. the ‎( )10.Tom is kind boy. All students love him.‎ A. a ; / B. a ; the C. an ; / D. an ; the ( )11.Is book on the desk mine? Yes.‎ A. the B. a C. an D. /‎ ‎― s ‖on the ‎( )12.Even while he was in hospital, he went on writing songs.‎ A. a B. an C. t he D. / ( )13.Don ‘ t read .‎ A. in bed B. in the bed C. on bed D. on the bed ( )14.Smith is honest man.‎ A. a B. the C. an D. /‎ ‎( )15.China has population of 1,200,000,000.‎ ‎96‎ A. ‎/ B. an C. the D. a ‎( )16.What ‘ s fo椅r .子 ‖―?‎ A. English B. an English C. the English D. any English ‎( )17.Mary is cleverer of the two girls.‎ A. the B. a C. an D. much ( )18. young must look after old.‎ A. The ; a B. The ; the C. A ; a D. A ; the ( )19. earth is one of planets.‎ A. The ; sun ‘ s B. Th e ; the sun C. The ; the sun ‘ s D. The ; the suns ‘‎ ‎( )20.Tokyo is .‎ A. the capital of Japan B. capital of Japan C. Japan capital D. a capital of Japan ‎( )21.Kate sometimes plays violin( 小提琴 ) and sometimes plays table tennis before supper.‎ A. / ; the B. the ; / C. the ; the D. / ; /‎ ‎( )22. –Have you seen pencil? I left it here this morning.‎ ‎--Is it red one ? I saw it.‎ A. a ; the B. the ; the C. the ; a D. a ; a ‎( )23.There is orange tree behind house.‎ A. an ; the B. a ; a C. the ; the D. an ; / ( )24.—How long did you stay there ?‎ ‎--About half hour.‎ A. / B. one C. a D. an 练习题答案：‎ ‎1—— 5 DBDCA 6— 10 DABDB ‎11— 15 ADACD 16— 20 AABCA ‎21— 24 BDAD 教 后 录 课时授课计划 授课日期 年 月 日 星期 ‎ ‎97‎ 课 题 （第 课时） 初 中英语专辑（ 3）—— 代词 基础知识巩固：人称代词，物主代词，指事代词的运用 课时教学 目标 ‎基础练习巩固 重点和难 点 ‎中考链接 反身代词的灵活运用 教学媒体 A tape recorder , CAI 时 教 师 活 动 设 计 学生活动 间 ‎（一）指示代词： this , that , these , those. this , that 一般与可数名词的 单数连用，而不与不可数名词连用（但 that 可单独指代不可数名词） 。 that apple ( √ ) that meat ( × )‎ The weather in Sichuan is not so hot as [that]‎ ‎(二 )人称代词、物主代词和反身代词 ‎in Guangzhou.‎ ‎1）人称代词：主格、宾格（作主语为主格， 作宾语为宾格 ; 介 +‎ 宾格）‎ eg. 1)I thank you ‎2)You thank me.‎ ‎2）物主代词：形容词性物主代词和名词性物主代词。 一变 (my — mine); 二留 (his—his its— its)‎ 三加 s(your— yours ; our — ours ; her—hers ; their — theirs)‎ 用法：有名不名，无名是名 eg. This is （我的） book. This book is （我的） . [ my ; mine]‎ ‎3）反身代词：某某自己；亲自 单数 复数 yourself yourselves myself ourselves himself herself itself 反身代词的常见搭配：‎ ‎themselves 1. enjoy oneself 玩得高兴；过得愉快 2. hurt oneself 伤着自己 3. teach oneself = learn by o自n学eself ‎4.(all) by oneself （完全）独立地 5.help oneself to ‎ 请自便；随便吃, 6.look after oneself 自理；照顾自己 ‎98‎ 7. leave one by oneself 把 , 单独留下 8. lose oneself in 陶醉于 , ；沉浸于,‎ ‎（三）不定代词 1) some 与 any 一般情况下， some 用于肯定句， any 用于否定句、疑问句（但表 邀请、建议的问句中可用 some— 此类句型常以 could , would 开头）‎ 2) many + 可数 = a lot of : 许多 much + 不可数 ‎（但 a lot of 不能用于否定句）‎ 3) few , a few ; little , a little ‎① . The story is easy to read. There are new words in it. [few]‎ ‎② . Hurry up! There is time left. [little]‎ ‎表否定 表肯定 可数 few( 几乎没有 ) a few(几个；一些 )‎ 不可 数 little( 几乎没有 ) a little( 一点儿少许 )‎ 4) everyone / anyone 不加 of no one 不加 of none of ‎( ) of us wants to read the book. [B]‎ A. Everyone B. Every one C. Nobody D. No one 5） other ,another , others 单数 复数 定语 主语、宾语 泛 another 指 三者以上的另一个 ‎‎ other some others 特 one the other 指 一个, 另一个 ‎the others =the other+‎ 复名 ( 另外的人或物 )‎ ‎① . We study subjects besides Chinese.‎ ‎② . May I have apple ?‎ ‎③ . These cups are clean. are dirty.‎ ‎④ .I have two pens. One is red , is blue. [ other ; another ; others ; the others]‎ 另外注意： one another (三者以上的 )相互 each other (两者的 )相互 We should learn from each other( 说明 we 指两个人 ) They help one another ( 说明 they 指三个人以上 )‎ ‎6) 二者与三者 复数 单数 单数 二者 both(都 ) neither( 都不 ) either( 任何一个 )‎ 三者 all( 都 ) none(都不 ) any(任何一个 )‎ 注意：‎ ‎① . both 否定 neither all 否定 none ‎② . both , all 不但作主语为复数，且被修饰的词也为复数； neither ,‎ ‎99‎ none 作主语为单数，但 none of + 复名， neither of + 复名 ‎( )1. of my parents is a teacher. [B]‎ A. None B. Neither C. Both D. All ‎( )2.There are many trees on [C]‎ A. both B. any C. either D. all every one / any one of ‎7) each: (二者以上的 ) 每个 —— 作主、宾、定）‎ every: (三者以上的 )每个 —— 只作定语）‎ ‎① . student in the class likes English.‎ ‎② . of the students studied hard.‎ ‎[Every ; Each]‎ 练 习 ‎side of the river.‎ ‎( )1. office is much smaller than .‎ A. Ours ; yours B. Our ; yoursC. Theirs ; our ‎( )2. ― Help to some meat. ‖ my uncle said to me .‎ A. themselves B. yourself C. yourselves ‎( )3. There are twenty teachers in our school. Eight of them are men teachers and are women teachers.‎ A. others B. the others C. another ‎( )4.There isn ‘ t pnaptheer ibox. Will you go and get for me ?‎ A. any ; some B. any ; any C. some ; any ‎( )5.There are many trees on sides of the street.‎ A. both B. all C. each ‎( )6. of them has a dictionary and one of them can look up words in it.‎ A. Each ; every B. Every; each C. Every; every ‎( )7. ― When shall we meet, this afternoon or tonight? ‖‎ ‎― I don ‘ t mind. time is OK.‎ A. Either B. Every C. Neither ( )8.Would you like cup of tea?‎ A. other B. the other C. another ‎( )9.The two friends were so pleased to see each other that they forgot ‎ .‎ A. other everything B. anything else C. everything else.‎ ‎( )10. of his parents is a teacher.‎ A. Both B. Neither C. None ‎( )11.The river is very dirty. people go to swim in it.‎ A. Few B. A few C. Little ‎( )12.A friend of came to see yesterday.‎ A. his ; his B. he ; him C. his ; him ‎( )13.You can ‘ t leave your baby by at home.‎ A. herself B. himself C. itself ‎100‎ ‎( )14. My father is very busy with his work. He has time to have a rest.‎ A. little B. a little C. few ‎( )15.I have three skirts. One is red. two are black.‎ A. another B. the other C. the others ‎( )16.Jack has friends here. So he often feels lonely.‎ A. a little B. a few C. few ( )17.Who teaches French?‎ A. we B. our C. us ‎( )18.The boys were all tired, but of them stopped to have a rest.‎ A. any B. some C. none ‎( )19.Sorry, I can w‘ert yaonusr question. I know about the news.‎ A. a little B. little C. few ‎( )20.—Hello, Bill! Help to a cake .‎ ‎— Thanks .‎ A. your B. yourself C. yourselves 教 后 录 ‎101‎ 课时授课计划 授课日期 年 月 日 星期 ‎ 课 题 （第 课时）四、数词 基础知识巩固 ：基数词和序数词的灵活运用 课时教学 目标 ‎基础练习巩固 重点和难 点 ‎‎ 序数词的几种特殊用法 教学媒体 A tape recorder , CAI 时 教 师 活 动 设 计 学生活动 间 数词分为基数词和序数词。用于表示事物数目的词称为基数词， 表示事物顺序的词称为序数词。‎ ‎1. 基数词 (1000 以内的基数词的读法 ) 365— three hundred and sixty-five ‎505— five hundred and five 2. 基数词变序数词的方法：‎ 基变序，有规律；词尾要加 th。 一二三，特殊记；词尾分别 tdd。 八去 t ，九去 e ； ve 则以 f 替。‎ ty 则变作 ti ; 后面还有一个 e。 要是遇到几十几；只将个位变成序。‎ eg. one— first two — second three— third eight— eighth nine— ninth twelve — twelfth twenty— twentieth twenty-one –-twenty-first 3. 数词的应用： A、时刻表达法：‎ a. 整点：基数词 + o ‘ clock eg. It‘ s eight o ‘ clock now. b. 几点几分： 1．直接表达法：先小时后分 eg. 3:25 three twenty-five 2.间接表达法：先分后小时 ‎1)( <30 分钟 )用 past ：分钟 past 小时 eg. 3:25 twenty-five (minutes) past three 2) ( >30 分钟 )用 to： (60- 分钟数 ) to (小时数 +1)‎ eg. 3:35 twenty-five (minutes) to four ‎102‎ 3) ‎30 分钟 = half 15 分钟 = a quarter eg. 3:30 three thirty = half past three ‎3:15 three fifteen = a quarter past three. 3:45 three forty-five = a quarter to four B、日期表达法：月日，年（或日月年）‎ ‎1949 年 10 月 1 日 :‎ October1st , nineteen forty-nine ‎=the first of October, nineteen forty-nine 2000 年 : the year two thousand ‎=twenty hundred 2001 年 : twenty o one ‎3 月 1 日 : March the first = the first of March C、表编号：‎ 第 207 房间： Room 207‎ 第五课： Lesson 5 = the fifth lesson D、序数词与不定冠词 (a; an) 连用表“又一；再一”‎ eg. You ‘ ve done it three times. Why not try a fourth time?‎ E、分数的表达：分子（基数） 、分母（序数） eg. one third 三分之一 two thirds 三分之二 注意： 1.分子超过 1 时，分母加 s ‎2.含分数的短语作主语由分数后的词决定谓语 eg.1)One third of the students are girls.‎ 2) One third of the milk is mine.‎ ‎3.分数的特殊形式 1)one third = a third 2)one fourth = a quarter three fourths = three quarters 3)one second = a half F ‎、一些数词的复数 + of 表约数：‎ hundreds of ; thousands of ; millions of 练 习 ‎( )1.If you go out at night, you ‘ ll be able to see starts.‎ ‎103‎ A. thousands of B. thousand of C. nine thousands of D. thousands ( )2.Monday is day of the week.‎ A. first B. the first C. the second D. second ‎( )3.You ‘ ve done it twice. Why not try time?‎ A. third B. the third C. a third D. once ‎( )4.Which is the month? It ‘ s September.‎ A. nine B. nineth C. ninth D. ninety ( )5.December is of the year.‎ A. the twelfth months B. the twelfth month C. the twelveth months D. twelve months ‎( )6.There are floors in the building and he lives on the floor.‎ A. eighteen, fifteen B. eighteenth, fifteenth C. eighteen, fiveteen D. eighteen, fifteenth ( )7.I was born , 1982.‎ A. on June 2rd B. in June 2nd C. on June two D. on June 2‎ ‎( )8.It ‘ s from our home to the zoo.‎ A. two and a half hours ‘ walk B. a half and two hours walk C. two hours and a half hour ‘ s walk D. two and a half hour ‘ s walk ‎( )9.What time is it now? It ‘ s to six.‎ A. quarter B. a quarter C. quarto C. a quarto ( )10.Will you be back in ?‎ A. one or two minutes B. one minute or two C. two minutes or one D. two or one minute 教 后 录 ‎104‎ 课时授课计划 授课日期 年 月 日 星期 ‎ 课 题 （第 课时）五、介词 基础知识巩固：常用介词的运用 课时教学 目标 ‎基础练习巩固 重点和难 点 ‎固定词组的识记 教学媒体 A tape recorder , CAI 时 教 师 活 动 设 计 学生活动 间 ‎1.in; on; at 用在时间词前，表“在”‎ ‎1)at + 具体时刻 ‎2)on + 具体某天（具体某天的上、下午等；星期词；以及上、下午 词前有修饰词时）‎ ‎3)in + 年、月、季节及一天中的某部分 但注意： at night= in the night at noon at this / that time at Christmas eg. 1. the morning 2. Monday morning 3. a rainy evening 4. 3:50 5. 2002 6. the morning of April 10 7. spring 8. night 9. this time 10. March 另外注意：在时间词（ morning , afternoon , evening ; Sunday ）前有 last, next , this , that 时，不再用介词 . tomorrow, tonight 前也不用介词。‎ eg. I will go(A) to the cinema(B) in(C) this evening.‎ 2. in , on , at 表地点：‎ at 一般指小地方； in 一般指大地方或某个范围之内； on 往往表示 “在某个物体的表面” 。例如：‎ eg. 1)He arrived Shanghai yesterday.‎ ‎2)They arrived a small village before dark. 3)There is a big hole the wall.‎ ‎4)The teacher put up a picture the wall.‎ 3. in , on , to 表方位 in( 范围内 )； on( 范围外且接壤 )； to( 范围外但不接壤 )。可表示为下 图的位置关系 eg.1)Taiwan is in the southeast of China.‎ 2) Hubei is on the north of Hunan.‎ ‎105‎ 2) Japan is to the east of China.‎ cross: 动词“跨过，越过” =go across 4. across: （表面）跨过 through: （内部）穿过，贯穿 介词 eg. 1)Can you swim the river?‎ 2) The road runs the forest.‎ 3) ‎ the bridge, you ‘ ll find a cinema. 5. in + 时间段：与将来时连用 after + 时间段：与过去时连用 但 after + 时间点：可与将来时连用。‎ 1) I ‘lellave three o ‘ clock.. That is, I ‘ ll leave about ten minutes.‎ 2) They left two weeks. 6. in the tree( 外加在树上的事物 )‎ on the tree(树上自身具有的花、果、叶等 ) in the wall( 镶嵌在墙内部的事物 )‎ 7. on the wall( 墙表面的事物 )‎ 1) There is a map the wall 2) There are four windows the wall. 8.by bike / bus / car / ship ( 单数且无冠词 )‎ 但当这些交通工具名词前有其它修饰词时，则应使用相应的介词。‎ eg. by bike = on a(the; his) bike by car = in a(the ; her) car on: 在 , （表面）上 —— 接触 ‎9. over: 在 , 的正上方 above: 在 , 的斜上方 未接触 1) The moon rose the hill.‎ 2) There is a bridge the river.‎ 3) There is a book the desk.‎ ‎10. between: 在（两者）之间 among : 在（三者以上）之间 ‎1)A big crowd of people were waiting for Li Lida on the beach.‎ ‎ them were his parents. 2)Tom sits Lucy and Lily. 11.on 与 about : 关于 on 用于较正式的演讲、学术、书籍等 about 用于非正式的谈话或随便提及 eg. He gave a talk the history of the Party 12. in front of : 在 , 前面 /方（范围外 ） = b efore in / at the front of: 在 ,, 前部（范围内）‎ 1) There is a big tree of the classroom. 2)A driver drives of the bus.‎ 类似区别： at the back of 与 behind 12. with 和 in: 表示“用“‎ ‎106‎ with: 指“用工具、手、口等”‎ in: 指“用语言、话语、声音等”‎ 1) Please write the letter a pen.‎ 2) Please speak a loud voice.‎ 13. on a farm ; in a factory ; the girl in the hat ; leave for: 动身前往某地 ‎15.一些固定搭配：‎ ‎（ 1）介词与动词的搭配 listen to , laugh at, get to, look for;‎ wait for, hear from, turn on, turn off, worry about, think of, look after, spend on ,等。‎ ‎（ 2）介词与名词的搭配 on time, in time, by bus, on foot,‎ with pleasure, on one ‘ s way to, in trouble, at breakfast, at the end of, in the end 等。‎ ‎（ 3）介词与形容词的搭配 be late for, be afraid of, be good at, be interested in, be angry with,‎ be full of, be sorry for 等。‎ 教 后 录 ‎107‎ 课时授课计划 授课日期 年 月 日 星期 ‎ 课 题 （第 课时） 从属连词和并列连词 课时教学 目标 ‎掌握连词的用法 重点和难 点 ‎常用连词的灵活运用 教学媒体 A tape recorder , CAI 时 间 从属连词和并列连词 ‎教 师 活 动 设 计 学生活动 ‎（一）从属连词：用于连接各种从句的连词 ‎（二）并列连词：‎ 并列连词用来连接具有并列关系的词，短语或句子。常见的并列 连词有：‎ ‎1.表并列关系的 and, both and, not only but also, neither等。‎ ‎‎ nor 2. 表选择关系的 or, either 等o。r ‎3. 表转折关系的 but, while （然而）等。‎ ‎4.表因果关系的 for, so 等。‎ ‎5. and: “和”在肯定句中表并列 or: “和”在否定句中表并列 另外： 1)or “或者”用于选择疑问句 1) or “否则”‎ eg. ①. Which do you like better, tea or milk?‎ ‎② . Hurry up, or you ‘ ll be late for school.‎ ‎6.but “但是”表转折 eg. I listened, but I heard nothing.‎ 注意： 1)though( 虽然 ), but( 但是 )不能连用 2)not but 不是 , 而是 eg. This book isn ‘ t mine but yours.‎ both and :既 , 又（连接主语为复数）‎ neither nor既:‎ ‎不 , 也不 连接两主 ‎7. either or或:‎ ‎者 , 或者 语后者决 not only but al不so但:‎ ‎, 而且 定单、复 eg.1)Both he and I are students. 2)Neither he nor I am a student.‎ ‎108‎ 练 习 ‎( )1. the afternoon of May, we visited the old man. A. On A. At C. In ‎( )2.Many people work the day and sleep night. A. on ; at B. in ; in C. in ; at ‎( )3.He speaks Japanese best the boy students. A. between B. with C. among ‎( )4.A wolf ‎ B. in C. on ‎a sheep skin is our dangerous enemy. A. with ‎( )5.Joan hopes to come back three days.‎ A. after B. for C. in ‎( )6.They sent the letter to me mistake.‎ A. by B. for C. with ‎( )7.He left home a cold winter evening.‎ A. at B. on C. in ‎( )8.Shanghai is the east of China.‎ A. in B. on C. to ‎( )9. my father ‘ s help, I have finished my composition.‎ A. Under B. On C. with ‎( )10.He ‘ s very strict himself and he ‘ s very strict his work.‎ A. with ; in B. in ; with C. with ; with ( )11.I really can ‘ t agree u_. yo A. to B. on C. with ‎( )12.The shop won ‘ t open nine in the morning.‎ A. until B. at C. during ( )13.How about the flowers now?‎ A. watering B. are watering C. watered ( )14.She spent all his money books.‎ A. in B. with C. on ‎( )15.They are talking low voices.‎ A. with B. in C. on ‎( )16.It ‘ s very kind you to help us.‎ A. for B. to C. of ‎( )17.What will you have breakfast this morning?‎ A. with B. for C. by ( )18.A plane is flying the city.‎ A. on B. over C. above ‎( )19.You are free to speak the meeting.‎ A. at B. in C. on ‎( )20.Mr. Green will stay in China Friday.‎ A. to B. on C. till ‎( )21.It ‘ s wrong to play tricks other people.‎ A. on B. of C. with ‎( )22.Which color do you like? I prefer blue ‎ B. as C. to ‎red. A. for ‎109‎ ‎( )23.The student will give us a talk how to use our spare time.‎ A. for B. on C. in ‎( )24.I paid two hundred yuan that kind of bicycle.‎ A. in B. for C. on ‎( )25.The doctor is very kind his patients A. to B. on C. at ( )26.We can ‘ t live air.‎ A. in B. with C. without ‎( )27.The child was afraid for C. of ‎the strange sound. A. at B.‎ ‎( )28.He was very angry her for being late. A. for B.‎ with C. at ‎( )29.What do you think the play?‎ A. about B. like C. of ‎( )30.I think it ‘ s the right way to work out the problem, but I am not sure ‎ it.‎ A. do B. for C. of ‎( )31.Reading the sun isn ‘ t good you A. under ; for B. in ; for C. in ; to ‎( )32.I won ‘ t ask about it, Igoing to s‘eemit my own eyes.‎ A. by B. for C. with ‎( )33.We go to school every day ‎ B. without C. on ‎Sunday. A. except ‎( )34.There is a small river the two towns A. in B. between C. among ‎( )35.Li Lei sometimes falls asleep through C. during ‎the lesson. A. for B.‎ ‎( )36.Mr. Black went to Paris a few days.‎ A. for B. in C. after ‎( )37.They will leave London next month.‎ A. to B. from C. for ‎( )38.Are you going to the zoo bus or my car?‎ A. on ; by B. by ; in C. on ; in ‎( )39.He woke up several times the night A. in B. at C. on ‎( )40.No one can stop her going away.‎ A. of B. from C. out of ‎( )41.What do you mean ― bao zhi ‖?‎ A. on B. with C. by ‎( )42.You ‘ ll get a nice present your parents your birthday.‎ A. from ; on B. for ; at C. frm ; in ( )43.Light comes in the window.‎ A. from B. across C. through ‎( )44.There are many apples the tree. A bird the tree is picking an apple.‎ A. in ; on B. on ; in C. in ; at ‎110‎ ‎( )45. ― Who are you going to play ?‎ A. about B. by C. against ‎― Grade‖Two. ‖‎ ‎( )46. Don ‘ t g_o the street. The bus is coming.‎ A. cross B. across C. past ‎( )47.He lives the twentieth floor No. 154 Zhongshan Street.‎ A. on ; at B. in ; in C. on ; in ‎( )48.He found a piece of useful information the Internet.‎ A. at B. on C. in ( )49. my surprise, he lost the game.‎ A. With B. To C. On ‎( )50.The blind man knows the money touching and feeling it.‎ A. with B. by C. through ‎( )51. We traveled overnight to Paris and arrived 5 o ‘ clock ‎ the morning.‎ A. on; in B. at; in C. at; on D. in; on ‎( )52. Where ‘ s Lily? We are all here her.‎ A. beside B. about C. except D. with ‎( )53. She sent her friend a postcard a birthday present.‎ A. on B. as C. for D. of ‎( )54. Jack has studied Chinese in this school the year of 2000.‎ A. since B. in C. on D. by ‎( )55. ---What is a writing brush, do you know?‎ ‎--- It ‘ s writing and drawing.‎ A. with B. to C. for D. by ‎( )56. English is widely used travellers and business people all over the world.‎ A. to B. for C. as D. by ‎( )57. the help of my teacher, I caught up with the other students.‎ A. Under B. In C. With D. On ‎( )58. Hong Kong is the south of China, and Macao is the west of Hong Kong.‎ A. in; to B. to; to C. to; in D. in; in ‎( )59. --- You‘ d better not go out now. It ‘ s raining.‎ ‎--- It doesn ‘ t matter. My new coat can keep .rain A. in B. of C. with D. off ‎( )60. Japan lies the east of China.‎ A. to B. in C. about D. at ‎( )61. ---Will the foreigners have any problems talking with Chinese in 2008?‎ ‎--- I don ‘ t think so. Now the young ‎ theold can speak some English.‎ A. either or B. not only but also C. neither nor D. both or ‎( )62. We didn ‘ t catch the train we left late.‎ A. so B. because C. but D. though ‎( )63. Tom failed in the exam again he wanted to pass it very ‎111‎ much.‎ A. if B. so C. though D. as ‎( )64. I won ‘ t believe that the fi-vyeear-old boy can read five thousand words I have tested him myself.‎ A. after B. when C. if D. until ‎( )65. The book was so interesting that he had read it for three hours ‎ he realized it.‎ A. when B. until C. after D. before ‎( )66. --- This dress was last year ‘ s style.‎ ‎---I think it still looks perfect it has gone out this year.‎ A. so that B. even though C. as if D. ever since ‎( )67. Hurry up, you will miss the train.‎ A. and B. so C. however D. or A. so as B. so that C. as as D. too to ‎( )68. The mountain was steep few people in our city reached the top.‎ ‎( )69. --- Do you remember our pleasant journey to Xi ‘ an?‎ ‎---Of course. I remember everything it happened yesterday.‎ A. as soon as B. even though C. rather than D. as if ‎( )70. you can ‘ t answer this question, we have to askmseoone else for help.‎ A. Although B. While C. Whether D. Since 教 后 录 ‎112‎ 课时授课计划 授课日期 年 月 日 星期 ‎ 课 题 （第 课时）七、形容词、副词的比较等级 课时教学 目标 ‎开容词副词比较级最高级的运用 重点和难 点 ‎不规则变化的识记 教学媒体 A tape recorder , CAI 时 教 师 活 动 设 计 学生活动 间 ‎1.原级：表示 A 与 B 在某方面相同。 句型： 1) A + 谓 + as + 原级 + as + B ‎2) A + 谓 (否定 ) + as/so + 原级 + as + B A 与 B 在某方面不同 注意： not as / so as = less tha不n 及；不如 eg. 1)This girl is as beautiful as that one.‎ 2) You don ‘ t eat so much as I 3) This book isn ‘ t as interestitnhgataosne ‎= This book is that one 2.比较级： 两者 进行比较（常与 than 连用） 1)I am cleverer than you 我比你聪明。‎ ‎2)He runs faster than Jim 他比 Jim 跑得快。‎ ‎3)I picked more apples than Jim. 我比你摘的苹果多。‎ 4) Which is more interesting, t his one or that one? 哪本书更有趣， 这本 还是那本？‎ ‎3.最高级： 三者（或三者以上） 进行比较 （ 常与表范围的 in , of 短语连用 ）‎ ‎( 注意 ： of + 个体名词单数 in + 集合名词 ) eg. 1)Shanghai is the biggestcity in China .‎ 2) He runs fastest in our class.‎ 3) He is the tallest of the three boys.‎ 4) Which is the easiest, Lesson1, Lesson2 or Lesson3?‎ ‎4.形、副比较等级的其他用法 ‎1) 比―较级 and 比较级 ‖表示 ―越来越 ,, ‖‎ ‎113‎ eg. lazier and lazier 越来越懒 ‎(但注意：如果多音节词用此结构时应为 more and more + 形、副 ) eg. more and more beautiful 越来越漂亮 ‎2) ― th比e较级 ， the 比较级 ‖ ―越 ,, ，越 ,, ‖‎ eg. the more, the better 多多益善 ‎ you are, you will get.‎ 你越懒，收获越少。‎ ‎3) ― the比较级 of + 二者 ‖ 二―者中较 ,, 的一个 ‖‎ eg. 1) Lucy is the younger of the twins.‎ ‎2) Of(A) the two books(B) this one(C) is thicker(D).‎ ‎4)表示二者相差多少用 “具体数量 + 比较级”‎ eg. He ‘a hsead taller than me.‎ My brother is two years older than me ‎5)表示“是 ,, 几倍”时用“ twice; three times 等 + as a”s eg. 1)This book costs twice as much as that one. 这本书的价钱是那本书 的两倍。‎ ‎2)He has four times as many books as I have 他拥有的书是我拥有的 四倍。‎ ‎6)区别 older / elder 与 farther / further older（年龄较老的） elder（指兄弟姐妹中排行在前的）‎ eg. My brother is than me. farther ( 指距离“较远的” )‎ further( 指抽象事物的“更进一步的” ) eg.1)He went abroad for studies.‎ 2) Fusun is from our school than Zhaohua.‎ 形、副比较等级还应注意 ‎1.比较级前用 a little ; much / a lot ; even / still 来加强语气， 表示 “ ,,‎ 一点儿； ,, 得多 ； 更,, ”‎ eg. 1) a little bigger 大一点儿 2) much more 多得多 ‎114‎ 2) even heavier 更重 但注意：不能在比较级前加 so; too; very; quite 等。‎ ‎2.比较级必须是同类事物相比（即 as; than 后的词应与主语是同类事 物）， 注意常用漏的代词有： that; those; one; ones eg. 1)The apples (A) in this basket (B) are redder (C) than in that basket(D). ‎ 2) This knife (A) isn ’t(B) so (C) new as that (D).‎ 3) Our classroom (A) is (B) bigger (C) than Lily (D).‎ ‎3.个体与整体相比，不能包括个体，常用“ any other + 单数 名词”来 进行比较。‎ eg.1） Betty( 是个体 ) is cleverer than any student in her class(是整体 ). ( × )‎ 正： Betty is cleverer than any other student in her class.‎ ‎=Betty is cleverer than anybody else in her class.‎ ‎=Betty is the cleverest in her class. (特别注意以上三种句型的转换 )‎ 2) China is bigger than any country in Africa.‎ 中国比非洲的任何一个国家都大。‎ 3) China is bigger than any other country in Asia. 中国比亚洲的任何 一个其他国家大。‎ ‎*4. 使用最高级时应把主语包括在范围内。‎ eg. Mary is the tallest of all her sisters.( × )‎ ‎(all her sisters 已排除了 Mary)‎ 改： Mary is the tallest of all the sisters.‎ ‎5.表示“第二、第三 ‎,, ”时，可在最高级前加“‎ second , third,‎ ‎,‎ ‎”‎ ‎（但“第一”不能用 first ）‎ eg. The Changjiang River is the first longest river in China. 改错：‎ 附：形、副比较级和最高级的变化规则 A、规则变化 ‎1.“辅 + y ”结尾，变 y 为 i 加 er , est ‎(但“形 + ly ”构成的副词除外 )‎ ‎2.双写加 er , est ‎115‎ ‎3.直接加 er , est / r, st ‎4.在多音词前加 more , most ( 以“形 + ly ”构成的副词也在前加 more , most)‎ B、不规则变化 原级 比较级 最高级 good/well better best many/much more most bad/ill/badly worse worst little less least old older/elder oldest/eldest far farther further ‎farthest furthest 另外：‎ ‎1) 以 -er , -ow , -ble , -ple 结尾的双音节词加 er, est / r, st. narrow ‎ simple ‎ able ‎ 2) tired pleased ‎ 3) often ‎ friendly ‎ ‎4)在形容词的最高级前一般加 the, 副词的最高级前一般不加 the (但当 形容词最高级前有物主代词、所有格时则不再加 the)。‎ eg. Lily is my the best friend.( 改错 ) ‎ ‎5)形容词作表语、定语， 修饰名词 (但部分形容词不能作定语，只能表语： ill ; alone ; asleep ; afraid ; interested ; excited ; surprised ).‎ 副词作状语， 修饰动词 。‎ 练 习 一、写出下列词的比较级和最高级 thin easy ‎ early new ‎ hot clever ‎ little late ‎ ‎116‎ narrow fat ‎ many big ‎ dangerous ‎ wonderful ‎ careful ‎ slowly ‎ popular ‎ 二、选择填空 ‎( )1.Which language is , English, French or Chinese?‎ A. difficult B. the difficult C. more difficult D. the most difficult ‎( )2.Yangpu Bridge is one of in the world A. bigger bridge B. the biggest bridge C. the biggest bridges D. bigger bridges ‎( )3.Tom is taller than Mike. But he is not Mike.‎ A. strong as B. so strong as C. so strong D. as strong ‎( )4.Most of the people in Guangdong are getting .‎ A. more and rich B. more rich and more rich C. richer and richer D. rich and rich ‎( )5.This text is easier and interes- ting than that one.‎ A. more ; much B. much ; more C. more ; more D. much ; much ‎( )6.Which do you like , beef, pork or chicken?‎ A. good B. well C. better D. best ‎( )7.Put on more clothes. It is snowing outside. A. strongly B. heavy C. heavily ‎( )8.John drives as as Tom.‎ A. carefully B. good C. nice D. fine ( )9.Is China larger than in Africa.‎ A. any country B. any other country C. any countries D. all countries ( )10.My brother is than I.‎ ‎117‎ A. elder, three years older B. older ; older C. older; three years elder D. elder ; elder ‎( )11.Li Mei is more beautiful than in her class.‎ A. any girl B. any other girl C. all the girls D. any girls ‎( )12.This problem is than that one.‎ A. ten times easy B. ten times easier C. ten times more easy D. ten time easier ‎( )13.This film is interesting than that one.‎ A. more B. much C. very D. the most ‎( )14.There is in today ‘ s newspaper.‎ A. interesting nothing B. nothing interesting C. interested nothing D. nothing interested ‎( )15.The teacher asked all the students in the class to keep their eyes ‎ .‎ A. close B. to close C. closing D. closed ‎( )16.The fat man always says his meat looks and sells .‎ A. good ; good B. well ; well C. good ; well D. well ; good ‎( )17.It seems that men are making computers than women.‎ A. better at B. good at C. well in D. weak in ‎( )18.The word ‘ s population is growing fast every minute, especially in some countries A. west B. more developed C. east D. less developed ‎( )19.This bridge is not hometown.‎ ‎long and wide ‎ ‎the one in my A. so ; as B. very ; than C. too; as D. very ; as ‎( )20.I think the song in the film ― Titanic ‖ is one of all the movie songs.‎ A. the most beautiful B. most beautiful C. much more beautiful D. a beautiful ‎( )21.Lin Tao is as as Zhang Hua.‎ ‎118‎ A. strong B. stronger C. strongest D. the strongest ‎( )22.Sara is tired move after the hard work.‎ A. very ; to B. quite ; to C. too ; to D. so ; that ‎( )23. Jack didn run‘ t _ to catch the bus.‎ A. enough fast B. quickly enough C. enough slow D. slowly enough ‎( )24.The driver is very . He often drives his car .‎ A. careful ; careful B. carefully; carefully C. carefully ; careful D. careful ; carefully ‎( )25.Look! All the children are working on the farm.‎ A. careful B. hard C. busy D. happy ‎( )26.The population of Shanghai is than that of Xi ‘ an.‎ A. smaller B. fewer C. much D. larger 教 后 录 ‎119‎ 课时授课计划 授课日期 年 月 日 星期 ‎ 课 题 （第 课时）动词 课时教学 目标 ‎动词的种类及不同种动词的运用 重点和难 点 ‎不同句式和时间状语下，时态的变化，不规则动词的过去式和过去分词 教学媒体 A tape recorder , CAI 时 间 Ⅰ —— 动词的四种形式 A、动三单的变法 ‎教 师 活 动 设 计 学生活动 ‎1) 辅―+y ‖结尾 , 变 y 为 i 加 es ‎2) 以― s; sh; ch; x; o 结尾 , 加 es ‎3) 直接加 s 但 have----has B、现在分词的变法 ‎1) 去 e 加 ing (e 不发音 )‎ ‎2) 双写加 ing ( ―辅元辅 ‖结尾且重读 ,y;w 列外 )‎ ‎3) 直接加 ing 写出下列动词的现在分词 ‎1.see 2.come 3.stop 4.open 5.listen 6.drop 7.prefer 8.fix 9.relax 10.die 11.tie 12.lie C、动词的过去式和过去分词 ‎（一）不规则变化（ 见课本不规则变化表 P255）‎ ‎（二）规则变化 ‎1) 辅―+y ‖结尾，变 y 为 i 加 ed ‎2) 双写加 ed ‎3) 直接加 ed 写出下列动词的过去式和过去分词 ‎1.drop 2.stop 3.prefer ‎ ‎4.study 5.try 6.fix 7.relax ‎ 附Ⅱ —— 情态动词（ can/ could; may/ might; must; should ） +动原 1. must(必须 )—— needn ‘不t(必 )‎ may(可以 )—— mustn ‘不t(许；不准；不可以 ) 2.注意几个题：‎ ‎1)— May I go with you?‎ — No, you .‎ ‎2)— Must I turn off the light now?‎ — Yes, you / No, you ‎ ‎120‎ 附Ⅲ —— 动词不定式与动名词 A、动词不定式作宾补 1) tell / ask / want sb to do ‎ 否定式： tell/ask/want sb not to do ‎ ‎2)省 to 不定式作宾补 即： (l, m, n, 3h, 2 看 , 1f) sb do l— let; m— make; n— notice; 3h—hear, have, help; 2 看 — see, watch; 1f— feel 但注意： 1)help sb (to) do (to 可省、可不省 ) 2)在改作被动语态时省去的 to 应还原 eg. Someone heard him sing in the room.‎ He was heard to sing in the room.‎ B、动词不定式与动名词的区别 ‎1.(hope; learn; want=would like; decide) to do 2.(enjoy; finish; keep; mind; practise) doing be busy ( in )‎ spend...( in )‎ feel like stop /‎ ‎keep /‎ ‎prevent ...‎ ‎from m ake a ‎contributi ‎on to ‎doing prefer doing to have have ‎fun som e problem s be worth stop ‎to do : 停下来去做（另一件事 ）‎ doing ‎: 停止做（正在做的事）‎ 2. forget ‎to do : 忘记做 ‎（未做）‎ doing to ‎: 忘记已做了 do : 记住做 ‎（已做）‎ ‎（未做）‎ rem em ber ‎doing ‎: 记住已做了 ‎（已做）‎ ‎4.(see, watch, hear) sb ‎do(动作结束） doing(动作在进行）‎ ‎5.go on ‎to do : 接着做 ‎（另一件事）‎ doing ‎: 继续做 ‎（原来的事）‎ ‎121‎ ‎6（.‎ ‎begin, start , like)‎ ‎to do doing ‎(常可替换）‎ Why had ‎7 .‎ ‎not better 动原 Will ‎/ would ‎/ Could ‎you ‎please prefer ‎to do ‎rather ‎than ‎8.介词 +doing eg. 1)What/ How about doing 2)be good at doing 附Ⅳ —— 宾语从句与状语从句中的时态 ‎1.状语从句中的时态：‎ 主句 时间、条件句 ‎1）一般将来时 2）祈 使句 3）情态动词原形 ‎一般现在时 一般过去时 一般过去时 eg.1)I ‘callll you as soon as he (come) back.‎ 1) He won ‘ t go to bed until he (finish) his homework. 3)I ‘ ll help you if I (be) free tomorrow ‎2.宾语从句中的时态：‎ 主句 宾语从句 一般现在时 一切时态 过去范畴的某一时态（一般 一般过去时 ‎过去时；过去进行时；过去 完成时；过去将来时）‎ 但当宾语从句是指客观事实、普遍真理、自然现象时，则只能用一般 现在时。‎ eg.1)He said his father (come) back in two days.‎ ‎2)The teacher said light (travel) faster than sound.‎ 附Ⅴ —— 主谓一致 ‎1.表“时间、距离、金钱、长度”的名词短语做主语时应看作一个整 体，视为三单 eg. Two months is quite a long time. 2.people; police 形单实为复，作主为复 eg. The police are looking for the missing boy. 3.maths, news, physics ‎ 形复实为单，作主为单 ‎4.family; class 看作整体时作主语为单数； 看作整体中的各成员时则为 复数。‎ eg. 1)My family is a big one.‎ ‎2)My family are watching TV .‎ ‎5.由 with, except, as well as 连接的两名词作主语，谓语由 前者决定 eg. The teacher with his students is going to Beijing tomorrow.‎ ‎122‎ ‎6.由 neither nor; either or; not only 谓语由 后者决定 eg. Neither he nor I am a teacher.‎ ‎连b接o的ut 两als名o词作主语，‎ ‎7. 不 定 代 词 （ something; anything; nothing; someone; anyone; everyone ）作主语为三单 Nobody knows it except me. 8.One of + 复名 作主语为单数 eg. One of my friends is a computer engineer. 9. ― the姓+的复数 ‖作主语为复数 eg. The Lius are watching TV now.‎ ‎10.sheep; deer; fish 单复同形，注意区别作主语是单还是复 eg. 1)There are many sheep on the hill.‎ ‎2)Milk white, and sheep white, too. (be 填空 )‎ ‎11.there be 结构中，如果有两个以上的名词作主语，则 be 应与最接近 的那个名词一致。 （即：靠近原则） eg.‎ 1) There a box and some pens on the desk. 2)There some pens and a box on the desk.‎ ‎12. either, neither, each 作主语为三单 eg. Neither of the twins (like) drawing.‎ ‎13.由两部分构成的事物名词 （ trousers, glasses, chopsticks）作主语为复 数，但当前面有 pair 短语修饰时， 则谓语由 pair 的单复数来决定谓语。‎ eg.1)Where (be) my glasses?‎ 2) That pair of trousers (be) Mr. Green ‘s 附Ⅵ —— “短命”动词与“长命”动词之间的转化 buy— have ; borrow — keep ; die — be dead ; leave— be away (from); come back—be back; fall asleep— be asleep ; open— be open ;‎ catch a cold— have a cold; go /get out — be out;‎ arrive (reach / get to / come to) + 地点 — be in + 地点； join— be in + 集体 ‎（或 be + 成员）；‎ turn on— be on; turn off — be off ; get a letter from —have a letter from.‎ end /finish — be over ; get up— be up ;‎ 1) He has (A) bought (B) the fridge (C) for (D) two years.‎ 2) How long (A) may (B) I borrow (C) the (D) book?‎ 3) The film (A) has begun (B) for five minutes(C).‎ 4) Tom has got (A) the letter (B) from (C) Jim for two days (D).‎ ‎5)I have (A) caught (B) a cold since two ‎ years ago (C).‎ 6) He has (A) come to (B) Beijing for ten years(C)‎ 7) My brother (A) has joined (B) the army (C) for (D) five years.‎ ‎123‎ 练 习 一、写出下列各时态的构成，然后找出各时态所对应的时间状语，只 写代号 ‎1、一般现在时： ‎ 时间状语 ‎ ‎2、一般过去时 ‎ 时间状语 ‎ ‎3、一般将来时 : ‎ 时间状语 ‎ ‎4、现在进行时 时间状语 5、 现在完成时 时间状语 6、过去进行时 时间状语 ‎ 提供的时间状语如下：‎ A.‎ since she came in B. in two days C.‎ when she came in D. next week E. often F. five days ago G. sometimes H. last year I. look 之后的句子 J. just K. at 4:30 yesterday L. so far M. for ten years N. since two years ago 二、用所给动词的适当形式填空 ‎1.Mother (watch) TV every evening. 2.We (talk) when the teacher came in. 3.He (go) to Beijing two days ago.‎ 4. He (leave) Chengdu in two days.‎ 5. Look! The boy (play) football on the playground. 6.My uncle (live) here for ten years.‎ 7. He often helps the old woman (carry) water.‎ 8. Would you like to make a contribution to (improve) our living conditions?‎ 9. Don ‘ t forget (turn) off the lights before you go out.‎ 10. Please let the girls (go) first.‎ 11. They had great fun (play) football this afternoon. 12.Do you enjoy (watch) TV?‎ 13. Would you like (have) a cup of tea?‎ 14. You can (go) there tomorrow. 15.Would you mind my (open) the door? 16.Please ask him (speak) more loudly ‎17.I ‘ ll go fishing if it (be) fine tomorrow.‎ ‎18.He said his grandpa (be) dead for ten ‎ years. 19.Tell the children (not play) in the street.‎ ‎20.Mr Zhu spent much time (help) me with my English.‎ ‎124‎ ‎21.I ‘ ll tell you as soon as he (come) back. 22.Each of us (want) to go to college. 23.Thank you for (help) me.‎ ‎24.The teacher told us the earth (go) round the sun. 25.My father is good at (fish).‎ 26. You ‘ d better (not talk) in class.‎ 27. The teacher stopped (talk) to us when we went into the office.‎ ‎28.I saw her (cook) when I got home.‎ ‎29.Look! A woman with two children (be) coming towards us. 30.His family not big, but the family (be) interested in music. 31.Two months (be) quite a long time.‎ ‎32.He asked if Tom (come) in two days 33.One of our teachers (be) a foreigner.‎ ‎34.The Greens (have) been to the Great Wall twice. 35.He is practicing (speak) English with Mr. Green.‎ ‎36.This pair of glasses mine. The glasses on the table his (be). 37.There an apple, a pear and some bananas on the table. (be) 38. (read) in bed (be)bad your eyes.‎ 39. Hello, Jim! I (not know) you we in Chengdu. I (tell) you were still in London.‎ 40. It (say) that another bridge (build) over the river next year.‎ 41. He left the room without (say) goodbye.‎ 42. Many trees (plant) in our school yard these years.‎ 43. The police (be) trying to catch the thief.‎ 44. The family (be) spending the weekend together.‎ 三、选择填空 ‎( )1.— Must I turn off the light now?‎ ‎---No, you ‎ A. needn ‘Bt . mustn ‘Ct . can ‘t ‎( )2.Our teacher told us the sun in the east. A. rose B. rises C. is rising ‎( )3.He back in a month.‎ A. will come B. come C. came ( )4.I him before.‎ A. met B. had met C. have met ‎( )5.The teacher to Japan this year. She‘ nsow telling her pupils about it.‎ A. went B. has been C. has gone ‎( )6.It hard when I got home yesterday.‎ A. rained B. is raining C. was raining ( )7.Why not again?‎ A. to try B. try C. trying ( )8.He has finished the letter.‎ A. writing B. to write C. wrote ( )9.It every night.‎ ‎125‎ A. happens B. is happened C. happened ‎( )10.The policeman told the children in the street.‎ A. not play B. not to play C. don ‘ t play ( )11.The box is too heavy for me .‎ A. to carry it B. to carry C. carrying it ( )12.Stop and listen to the teacher.‎ A. to read B. read C. reading ‎( )13.He is still looking for a house .‎ A. to live B. to live in C. to live in it ‎( )14.I heard her when I passed her room just now. A. sing B. singing C. to sing ‎( )15.—May I go with you ?‎ ‎---No, you .‎ A. may not B. can not C. mustn ‘t ‎( )16.There are some in the river.‎ A. air B. fish C. water.‎ ‎( )17.Sheep white and milk white, too.‎ A. is ; is B. is ; are C. are ; is ‎( )18.The class going to see a film this afternoon.‎ A. am B. is C. are ‎( )19.Jim ‘ s shoes under the bed.‎ A. are B. is C. was ‎( )20.Three years quite a long time.‎ A. is B. are C. were 教 后 ‎ 录 ‎126‎ 课时授课计划 授课日期 年 月 日 星期 ‎ 课 题 （第 课时） 一般现在时态 (Simple Present tense)‎ 课时教学 目标 ‎通过操练、点评、专项练习等方式复习“一般现在时态”的 时态 结构。‎ 重点和难 点 一般现在时态中第三人称时动词加“ s”的用法 教学媒体 A tape recorder , CAI 时 教 师 活 动 设 计 学生活动 间 复习步骤设计 ：‎ ‎（一） 词汇复习 Revision of the words and phrases learnt in Unit One,dictation of the main ones 。（此环节根据中考 词汇表顺序进行听写检查）‎ ‎（二） 对话操练 Dialogue Acting —ask Ss to act out some dialogues about What do you usually do on Sundays/in the evening? （此 环节也可以采取学生达标积分制进行，即复习阶段课 前对话必须人人参与）‎ ‎（三） 语法复习 ： 一般现在时态 ：‎ ‎(A) 概念：表示某人 / 某事物经常发生的动作、习惯、状态 等。‎ ‎(B) 时态信号：常与 sometimes, often, usually, always, every day, in the morning, on Sunday 等词连用。‎ ‎127‎ ‎(C) 动词形式：用实义动词原形，第三人称时用动词加 ‎“s”形式，简 称“三单动 s”形式，“ Be”动词用“ am/ is/ are ”的形 式。‎ ‎(D) 情态动词后面直接加实义动词原形。‎ ‎(E) 在某些动词后面须用动词原形进行搭配，如 let sb do sth, You ’d beterr do sth 等。 例解：‎ ‎1、 Now let me your names, OK?‎ A.‎ call B.‎ to call C.‎ calling D. calls 此题应选用“ A”项。在 “Let sb. ”后面的结构中应该 用 动词原形结构，不可以用其它形式，所以 B 项、 C 项和 D 项都是错误的。‎ ‎2、 He the washing on Sundays. He it on Saturdays.‎ A. doesn ’t/ does B. don ’t do/ does C. doesn’t do/ does D. not does/ does 此题应选用“ C”项。在第三人称“ He”为主语的否定句中 应该用助动词“ does ”加“ not ”构成否定式，再加动词原 形 “do” ， 所 以 B 项 和 D 项 是 显 性 错 误 ， 而 A 项 中 “doesn’t ”后面缺少动词原形，故也是错误的。‎ ‎128‎ ‎3、 There some pieces of paper on the desk.‎ A. is B. are C. have D. has 此题应选用“ B”项。在以“ There”为开头的句子中应 该用 “There be ”结构，不可以说 “There have ”，所 以 C项和 D 项是显性错误，而 A 项中“ is ”，把“ paper” 当成是单数了，而“ some pieces of, ”表示了纸张的间接 可数性，故 A 项也是错误的。‎ ‎4、I we can ’t go. It ’s going to rain.‎ A. will hope B. will be afraid C. will think D. am afraid 此 题 应 选 用 “D” 项 。 在 表 示 心 理 情 感 的 词 汇 如 ‎“ like/hope/ wish/ think/ guess/be afraid/ be sorry/‎ be sure/be surprised ”等不可以用将来时态， 故只能用“ am afraid ”。‎ ‎129‎ 教 后 录 课时授课计划 授课日期 年 月 日 星期 ‎ 课 题 （第 课时） 一般将来时态（ Simple Future tense ）‎ 课时教学 目标 ‎通过操练、点评、专项练习等方式复习“一般将来时态”的时态 结构及用法。‎ be going to /will /shall 的区别使用 A tape recorder , CAI 教 师 活 动 设 计 学生活动 重点和难 点 教学媒体 时 间 ‎130‎ 复习步骤设计 ：‎ ‎（一） 词汇复习 Revision of the words and phrases learnt in Unit Two ,dictation of the main ones 。（此环节也可根据中考 词汇表顺序进行听写检查）‎ ‎（二） 对话操练 Dialogue Acting —ask Ss to act out some dialogues about What are you going to do this Sunday / tomorrow? （此 环 节也可以采取学生达标积分制进行 , 学生可自由组合进 行）‎ ‎（三） 语法复习 ：一般将来时态：‎ ‎(A) 概念：表示某人 / 某事物即将发生（打算要做）的动作、 状态等。‎ (B) 时态信号：经常与 this evening, next week, tomorrow, in two years,‎ soon 等词连用。‎ ‎(C) 动 词 形 式 ： 用 时 态 助 动 词 “be going to ” 或 “will/shall ”加实义动 词原形构成。“ be going to ”常表示某人主观上打算，计 划去做某 事，大多情况下“ will ”与“ be going to ”可以互换，但 是“ will ”‎ ‎131‎ 更强调某人主观上的意愿和决心 , 而“ shall ”则常与第一 人称连 用，表示征求对方的意见。但是在表示既定的假日、年岁、 日期 等，不可以用“ be going to/shall ”表示， 应该用“ will ” 来表示。‎ 例解：‎ ‎1、 He here for Shanghai next term.‎ A. leaves B. left C. is leaving D. will be leaving 此题应选用“ C”项。在此句中应该用动词的将来时态结 构，所以 A 项和 B 项是显性错误，而 D项中的动词“ will be going to ”把“ will ”和“ be going to ”两种将来时态 结构同时用在了一处，所以 D项是错误的。‎ ‎2、 Would you like to a try again tomorrow ?‎ A. having B. have C. has D. will have 此题应选用“ B”项。在此句中应该用动词短语“ would like to do sth ”的搭配结构，而不可以用将来时态，所以 D 项是显性错误，而 A 项 C 项不是动词原形，所以也是错误 的。‎ ‎3、 He here for Shanghai next term.‎ A. leaves B. left C. is ‎132‎ leaving D. will be leaving 此题应选用“ C”项。在此句中应该用动词的将来时态结 构，所以 A 项和 B 项是显性错误，而 D项中的动词“ will be going to ”把“ will ”和“ be going to ”两种将来时态 结构同时用在了一处，所以 D项是错误的。‎ ‎4、Would you like to a try again tomorrow ?‎ A. having B. have C. has D. will have 此题应选用“ B”项。在此句中应该用动词短语“ would like to do sth ”的搭配结构，而不可以用将来时态，所以 D 项是显性错误，而 A 项 C 项不是动词原形，所以也是错误 的。‎ ‎5、You’d better your homework and it here tomorrow.‎ A. will finish/ bring B. finish/ will bring C. finish/ take D.‎ finish/ bring 此题应选用“ D”项。在此句中“ You’d better ”后面 应该用动词原形“ finish ”的搭配结构，而不可以用将来时 态，所以 A 项、 B 项是显性错误，而 C 项中动词“ take it here ”为方向性错误，所以也是不可选用的。‎ ‎6、 the boy free tomorrow morning ?‎ ‎133‎ A. Is B. Does C. Are D. Will 此题应选用“ A”项。根据句中的“ tomorrow morning ” 可以知道应该用动词的将来时态形式，但是 D 项中缺少动词 原形故是错误的，而“ be free ”是动词短语，所以 B 项也 是错误的。故应该用 A 项“ Is ”。在英语中表示已经事先安 排好的计划时，可以用现在时态代替将来时态。‎ ‎( 四) 巩固拓展 ：‎ 教 后 录 ‎134‎ 课时授课计划 授课日期 年 月 日 星期 ‎ 课 题 （第 课时） 一般过去时态及其疑问句句型 。‎ 课时教学 目标 ‎通过对话操练、语法点评、专项练习等方式学会一般过去时的用法 重点和难 点 ‎一般过去时态中动词与行为动词及助动词的不同用法 教学媒体 A tape recorder , CAI 时 间 复习步骤设计：‎ ‎教 师 活 动 设 计 学生活动 ‎（一）词汇复习 Revision of the words and phrases learnt in Unit 8- 10,dictation of the main ones and important sentences.‎ ‎（此环节可根据中考词汇表顺序进行听写检查）‎ ‎（二）对话操练 Dialogue Acting — ask Ss to act out some dialogues about were ‎What day was it yesterday? --Who wasn ‘ t here -?--‎ What did I get up this morning? --How many singers there in your band?---Were there any women singers in your band?etc.（ 此环节也可以采取学生达标积分制进 行 ,学生可自由组合进行）‎ ‎（三）语法复习：一般过去时态表示过去某一时刻发生的动作或存在 的状态 ,句中通常有表示过去某一时刻的时间状语如 : a day ago, last week, in 1996, yesterday, the other day,等也可以表示在过去一段时间 内，某人某物经常性或习惯性的动作。 Be 动词的过去式为 was/ were,‎ 行为动词的过去式分为规则动词和不规则动词变化两种。规则动词的 过去式为动词词尾加 ed 构成，不规则动词则参照课本表格内变化进 行。如： go— went/ do/does— did,etc.‎ 例解 :‎ ‎1、 The boy ill in bed three days ago, so he go to school.‎ A. was, didn ‘tB. is, don ‘Ct. was, wasn ‘tD. is, doesn ‘ t 此题的答案应为 A 。从 ―threedays ago‖中可以知道应该是一般过去时 态的 be 动词和助动词的用法，所以可排除 B 项和 D 项的可能性，因 为 ―ill 为‖形容词，而 ―beill 词 ―did与‖―not构‖成否定句。‎ ‎为‖动词短语， ―go‖为动词，故应该用助动 ‎2、 he busy doing his homework yesterday evening.‎ A. Did B. Are C. Were D. Was 此题中由 ―yesterday evening可‖知该句为一般过去时态，故 A 、B 项可 以排除，而 he 不可以与 ― were搭‖配，因此该题答案为 C。‎ ‎3、 My mother come back until eight yesterday evening.‎ A. did B. wasn ‘t C. doesn ‘tD. didn ‘ t 本题考查了助动词在否定句中的用法， 根据 ― yesterday evening可知‖本 ‎135‎ 题是一般过去时，一般过去时谓语动词是行为动词时，否定句应是 ‎― didn ‘动t词+ 原形 ‖。故此题答案为 D 。‎ ‎4、 When your mother finish last night ？‎ A. are, read B. did, reading C. did, read D. were, reading 此题中 ―lastnight ‖可知该句为一般过去时态，因此 A 项可以排除，因 为 finish 为动词， 由助动词来构成问句， D 项为显性错误， ―finish doing Sth ‖可得出该题的答案为 B 项。‎ ‎5、 He got up early and to work in a hurry.‎ A. drives B. drived C. drove D. is driving 此题应选 A 项。本句中虽然没有时间信号出现，但是从 ― got up 可‖‎ 以知道为过去时态， 所以应前后统一， 故 A 项和 D 项是显性错误， 而 ‎― drive的过‖去式不是 ― drived ，故‖ B 项也是错误的。 四、巩固拓展 教 后 录 ‎136‎ 课时授课计划 授课日期 年 月 日 星期 ‎ 课 题 （第 课时） 反意疑问句 (Tag Questions)的用法 掌握实意动词与 be 动词的反意疑问句构成方法及熟练运用 课时教学 目标 重点和难 点 ‎‎ 难点突破：反意疑问句前后半句的相反意义构成及判断 教学媒体 A tape recorder , CAI 时 间 语法重点：‎ ‎教 师 活 动 设 计 学生活动 知识目标：复习步骤设计：‎ ‎（一）词汇复习 Revision of the words and phrases learnt in Unit 11,dictation of the main ones and important sentences.‎ ‎（此环节可根据中考词汇表顺序进行听写检查）‎ ‎（二）对话操练 Dialogue Acting — ask Ss to act out some dialogues about You‘ re from Shanghai ,aren ‘ t you ? You like English very much, don ‘ t you ? He doesn ‘ t know much Chinese , does he ? The weather today is very cold , isn 节 也可以采取学生达标积分制进行 ,学生可自由组合进 行）‎ ‎etc.（此环‘ t it ?‎ ‎（三）语法复习：反意疑问句即前半句为肯定句，后半句为否定的一 般疑问句简略形式 ,或前半句为否定句， 后半句为肯定的一般疑问句简 略形式 ,简称 ―前肯后否，前否后肯 ‖。在同一个句中只能出现一个否定 形式。反意疑问句中问句的主语一定要用人称代词。 在有些祈使句中， 也会出现没有否定的反意疑问句，如： Let ‘gso to school, shall we ? Please give me a hand, will you ? etc. 这些表示请求或征求意见的祈使 句主要表示的是说话人委婉的语气，属于典型的特殊句型。‎ 例解：‎ ‎1、 The boy couldn ‘ t swim last year, ?‎ A. can he B. could he C. couldn ‘ t heD. did he 此题应选 B 项。本句从 ―couldn ‘t 可知‖为过去时态， 所以应前后统一， 故 A 项是显性错误， 而 ―could为‖情态动词， 可直接提问， 不能用助动 词提问，故 D 项是错误的，而 ―couldn ‘后t 面‖不能再用否定式提问了， 故 C 项也是错误的。‎ ‎2、 There was little meat in the fridge yesterday, ?‎ A. wasn ‘ t itB. wasn ‘ t thereC. was it D. was there 此题应选 D 项。本句中虽然没有直接出现否定词， 但是 ―little 是具‖有 否定意义的单词， 意为 ―几乎没有 ‖，但是容易让学生误解为肯定意义， 所以后半句中不能再出现否定结构，故 A 项和 B ‎ 项是显性错误，而 ‎― therebe ‖本来的意思为 ― 有 ‖，是固定句子结构 ,不能用代词 ― it‖‎ ‎137‎ 代替，故 C 项也是错误的。‎ ‎3、 Let ‘ s go swimming this afternoon, ?‎ A. don ‘ t we B. will we C. shall we D. won ‘ t we 此题应选 C 项。本句中虽然没有直接出现否定词， 但是 ―Let ‘是s ‎‎ 祈‖使 句，意为 ―咱们 ，好吗？ ‖，所以后半句中应该用 ― shall we ？ ‖结构， 故 A 项、 B 项和 D 项均是错误的。‎ ‎4、 Kate never comes to school late, ?‎ A. does she B is she C. doesn ‘ t shDe. does Kate 此题应选 A 项。本句中出现的否定词是 ―never是‖―not的‖强调形式， 意为 ―咱们 ，好吗？ ‖，所以后半句中不能再用否定式提问，故 C 项 是显性错误，而 ―comes‖为行为动词，应该用助动词 ―does提‖问 , 故 B 项也是错误的， 在反意疑问句中必须用人称代词形式， 故 D 项也是错 误的。‎ ‎5、 Please close the window for me, ?‎ A. don ‘ t you B. shall you C. will you D. do you 此题应选 C 项。本句中没有出现否定词，而 ―Please 则‖是表示请求 语气的祈使句，所以后半句中不能用否定式提问，应该用委婉的语气 表示 ―好吗 /你愿意吗 ?‖故 A 项、 D 项是显性错误 ,而―shallyou―是搭配 错误。‎ 四、巩固拓展 教 后 录 ‎138‎ 课时授课计划 授课日期 年 月 日 星期 ‎ 课 题 （第 课时） 感叹句的用法（ The Exclamatory sentences）‎ 课时教学 目标 ‎感叹词 How / What 的不同用法 重点和难 点 ‎掌握感叹句的构成方法及熟练运用 教学媒体 A tape recorder , CAI 时 教 师 活 动 设 计 学生活动 间 语法重点： 难点突破：复习步骤设计：‎ ‎（一）词汇复习 Revision of the words and phrases learnt in Unit 12,dictation of the main ones and important sentences.‎ ‎（此环节可根据中考词汇表顺序进行听写检查）‎ ‎（二）对话操练 Dialogue Acting — ask Ss to say out some sentences like How fine it is today ! / What a fine day today ! / What an interesting story it is ! How interesting it is ! etc. （此环 节 也可以采取学生达标积分制进行 ,学生可自由组合进 行）‎ ‎（三）语法复习 感叹句表示说话人强烈的语气，其构成有以下几种 : 1、 What +a/an + 形容词 +名词 +主谓结构肯定句！‎ eg: What a good boy he is!‎ ‎2、 What + 形容词 +名词 +主谓结构肯定句！‎ eg: What good news it is !‎ ‎（在口语中经常省略主谓结构肯定句）‎ ‎3、 How + 主谓结构肯定句！ eg: How I miss you !‎ ‎4、How+ 形容词 /副词 +主谓结构肯定句！ eg: How lovely the boy is! 5、 How + 形容词 +a/an +名词 +主谓结构肯定句！‎ eg: How fine a voice he has!‎ 例解：‎ ‎1、 What a rain ！ How it is raining !‎ A. heavily, heavy B. heavy, heavily C. heavily, heavily D. heavy, heavy 此题应选 B 项。从 ―Whata ‖中可以看出 ―rain 为‖名词，故应该用形 容词 ―heavy ‖修饰，而后半句中 ―raining ‖为动词，应该用副词 ‎― heavily修饰‖，所以 A 项、 C 项和 D 项均是错误的。‎ ‎2、 hot it is today! Will it be tomorrow than it is today ?‎ A. What, hotter B. How, hotter C. What , hot D. How, hottest 此题应选 B 项。从 ― it is today 中可‖以看出句中除了 ―hot以‖外没有 名词，故应该用 ―How‖来修饰，而后半句中 ―than 中‖可知是比较级，‎ ‎139‎ 应该用 ― hotter才‖符合语法。所以 A 项、 C 项和 D 项均是错误的。‎ ‎3、 the children are dancing !‎ A. What happy B. How happy C. How happily D. What happily 此题应选 C 项。从 ― the children are dancing! 中可以‖看出句中除了此 肯 定 句 以 外 没 有 名 词 ， 故 不 可 以 用 ―What‖来 修 饰 ， 而 句 中 的 ‎― dancing ‖中可知应该用 副词 ― happily才符‖合语法。所以 A 项、 B 项和 D 项均是错误的。‎ ‎4、 the weather was yesterday !‎ A. How cold B. What a cold C. How cold a D. What cold 此题应选 A 项。从 ― the weather was yesterday! 中可‖以看出句中除了 此肯定句以外没有名词，故不可以用 ―What‖来修饰， B 项和 D 项均 是显性错误，而 C 项的冠词 ― a是‖多余的，故也是错误的。‎ ‎5、 weather it is ! the weather is !‎ A. What a bad , How bad B. What bad, How bad C. What an bad, How bad D. How bad, What a bad 此题应选 B 项。从 ― itis! 中‖可以看出句中除了此肯定句以外只有名 词 ― ，‖故只能用 ―What‖来修饰， 故 D 项是显性错误，而 ―weather是‖ 不可数名词， 故不可以用冠词 ―a/ an连‖接，故 A 项和 C 项均是错误的。 四、巩固拓展 教 后 录 ‎140‎ 课时授课计划 授课日期 年 月 日 星期 ‎ 课 题 （第 课时） 邀请和应答 (Invitations and responses)‎ 课时教学 目标 ‎学会邀请他人和接受邀请或谢绝邀请时的应答方式 重点和难 点 ‎接受邀请时的婉转、礼貌的应答方式 教学媒体 A tape recorder , CAI 时 间 复习步骤设计：‎ ‎教 师 活 动 设 计 学生活动 ‎（一）词汇复习 Revision of the words and phrases learnt in Unit ‎13,dictation of the main ones and important sentences.‎ ‎（二）对话操练 Dialogue Acting — ask Ss to say out some sentences like Would you like to ?/‎ Will you please come to ?/‎ Could I speak to ?/ I'd like to invite you to /‎ Yes,I'd love to./‎ I'd love to ,but /I hope you can （ etc.‎ ‎（三）语法复习 :‎ 在英语中当表示说话人婉转的语气时常常使用 ―would‖和 ―could 等‖‎ 词，而不以 ―will 不同。‎ ‎和‖―can，‖虽其意义是一样的，但是语气的婉转程度 如― Could you help me with my English ?‎ ‎‖比 ― Can you help me 要婉.?转‖得多，‎ 同样 ―Would you please give me a hand ? ‖‎ 比 ―Will you give me a hand ? 要客‖气婉转一些。‎ 在口语和日常交际中人们更加注重于人与人之间的礼貌和互相尊重。 故委婉、客气的语气是十分需要的。‎ 例解：‎ ‎1、 you like to go to the cinema with me ?‎ A. Do B. Will C. Would D. Could 此题应选 C 项。从 ― you like to 中可. ‖以看出句中应该用 ―Would you like 来‖表示向对方提出婉转客气的请求。故只能选用 ― Would 才‖是 符合语气和语法的。‎ ‎2、 you wait for me at the school gate ?‎ A. Could B. Do C. Shall D. Must 此题应选 A 项。从 ― you wait for me .? ‖ 中可以看出句中应该用 ―Could you ‖来表示向对方提出婉转客气的 请求。故只能选用 ―Could 才‖是符合语气和语法的。‎ ‎3、Would you like to come to my house tonight ? -- I can ‘ t.‎ ‎141‎ A.I ‘ d love to.And B.It ‘ s a pity. And C. I ‘ d like to. But D.I don ‘ t like to, but 此题应选 C 项。从 ― Ican‘t.中‖可以看出是 ―去不成了 ‖，所以回答 中前后要符合逻辑。故只能选用 ―I ‘d like to. But I can 去，但我去不了 ‖。 四、巩固拓展 ‎表示‘―t我.‎ ‎很‖想 教 后 录 ‎142‎ 课时授课计划 授课日期 年 月 日 星期 ‎ ‎（第 课时） 简单句的五种基本句型的用法 课 题 课时教学 目标 ‎学会用简单句的各种句式进行表达 重点和难 点 ‎及物与不及物动词的区分、双宾语用法、宾语与宾补成分的区别 教学媒体 A tape recorder , CAI 时 间 复习步骤设计：‎ ‎教 师 活 动 设 计 学生活动 ‎（一）词汇复习 Revision of the words and phrases learnt in Unit 15 。‎ dictation of the main ones and important sentences. （此 环 节可根据中考词汇表顺序进行听写检查）‎ ‎（二）对话操练 Dialogue Acting —ask Ss to say out some sentences using different sentence patterns like Let ‘ s keep the window open. OK?/ Would you please pass me the salt ?/What are 标 ‎they doing over there ? etc.（ 此环节也可以采取学生达 积分制进行 ,学生可自由组合进行）‎ ‎（三）语法复习 简单句的第一种句式为主谓结构， 如 He laughs./They shouted. etc. 第二种句式为主谓宾结构， 如 We like Chinese tea. etc. 第 三种句式为主语加系表结构， 如 I am very happy. You look tired. Etc. 第 四种句式为主谓加双宾语结构，如 He gave me some fish and chips. 第 五种句式为主谓宾加宾补成分，如 I think him a clever boy. The story made us laugh .etc.‎ 例解：‎ ‎1、 John likes in the open air in the morning.‎ A. walking B. to walks C. take a walk D. to taking 此题应选 A 项。从 ― likes 中. ‖可以看出是 ―喜欢散步 ‖，而说明 ―喜 欢做某事情 ‖可以用 ―like doing 或 like to do 误的。‎ ‎表‖达，故其余三项均是错 ‎2、 We bought her a Beijing Duck. It ‘ s a sentence.‎ A. S+V B. S+V+O C. S+V+P D. S+V+InO+DO 此题应选 D 项。从 ―hera Beijing Duck. ‖中可知是 ―双宾语结构 ‖， ―a Beijing Duck 为直接宾语， her 为间接宾语 ‖，故其余三项均是错误的。‎ ‎3、 knows the sad news except you and me.‎ A. Both of them B. All of us C. Neither of them D. Neither of they 此题应选 C 项。从 ―knows ‖中可知主语是单数人称，故 A 项和 B 项 均不可能，而项的 ―they应‖该用宾格 ,故也是错误的。‎ ‎143‎ ‎4、 It that the players in blue were the winners.‎ A. seems B. seemed C. is seeming D. was seemed 此题应选 B 项。从 ―..were 中‖可知是过去时态的句子，故后面的时 态也应该和前面的一致 ,故必须使用 ―seemed‖。对于连系动词而言，没 有被动结构，故 D 项是错误的。‎ ‎5、 We make our country stronger and more .‎ A. beautiful B. nicely C. better D. beautifully 此题应选 A 项。从 ― stronger 中可‖知是形容词的比较级，故后面 的词性也应该和前面的一致 ,故必须使用 ―beautiful 。 ‖ 四、巩固拓展 教 后 录 ‎144‎ 课时授课计划 授课日期 年 月 日 星期 ‎ 课 题 （第 课时） 句子的分类（二）‎ 课时教学 目标 ‎并列句 there be 结构 复合句 重点和难 点 ‎并列句 there be 结构 复合句灵活运用 教学媒体 A tape recorder , CAI 时 教 师 活 动 设 计 学生活动 间 ‎1、并列句：由连词连接两个分句组成的句子叫并列句。这些分句平 等并列，而且同等重要，能够独立成句。连接分句的有并列连词和主 丛连词。‎ 并列连词有： and, but, or, nor, for, while, either or , neither now, not only but also 主从连词有： so, however, still, yet, then 并列句中的前后两句可以根据意思划分为四种关系。‎ (1) 同等关系： and / not only but also / neither nor He could neither read nor write.‎ He not only studies hard, but also likes sports.‎ (2) 转折关系： but / yet / still / while / when Tom was not there but his brother was ( there )‎ (3) 选择关系： or / either or Either you didn ‘ t understand this, or you were not careful enough.‎ ‎(4) 因果关系： for / so He hurried, for it was getting dark.‎ He liked the book very much, so I gave it to him.‎ ‎2、there be 结构 英语中“ there + be + sb. /sth.+ 地点”结构表示“某处有某人或某物” 。 There 是引导词，本身没有意思， be 是谓语动词， be 后面是主语， be 必须和主语的数保持一致。如：‎ There is a garden behind the house. There are two books on the desk.‎ 如果主语部分是两个以上的并列主语时， be 一般和邻近的主语的数保 持一致。如：‎ There is a cup and two books on the desk.‎ There are five students and a teacher in the classroom.‎ ‎3、复合句 ‎ 复合句中包括两个或更多的分句，其中一个分句是主句，其余的分句 是从句。从句就是一个分钟在主句中充当一个成分，如主语、表语、 宾语、定语、状语等。从句在句子中作什么成分就叫什么从句。‎ ‎145‎ ‎1、主语从句 用作主语的从句叫作主语从句，主语从句一般都是作谓语动词的主 语，偶尔也可以作分词的主语。‎ ‎(1) 由 what, that 引导的主语从句 What she likes is watching the children play. It is right that you told him the truth.‎ ‎(2) 由连接副词 whether, when, how, where, why 引导主语从句。‎ Why the fire broke out at night remains a mystery. Whether we can help you is a difficult question.‎ When the meeting will be held has not been decided. 2、表语从句 通常由 that, what, where, why, how 等连接词引导。‎ (1) if, whether, that 引导表语从句。‎ The question is that we must be good at learning from others.‎ (2) what, which, who 等连接代词 That is what I want to tell you.‎ The question is which of the classes we choose to be the excellent one.‎ (3) how, when, where, why 等连接副词。 The question is how we can help him. That is why he has been late.‎ 教 后 录 ‎146‎ 课时授课计划 授课日期 年 月 日 星期 ‎ ‎（第 课时） 情态动词 can 和 may 的用法 课 题 课时教学 目标 ‎用情态动词熟练进行会话交际 重点和难 点 ‎情态动词在具体语境中的不同含义 教学媒体 A tape recorder , CAI 时 间 复习步骤设计：‎ ‎教 师 活 动 设 计 学生活动 ‎（一）词汇复习 Revision of the words and phrases learnt in Unit 16 。‎ dictation of the main ones and important sentences.‎ ‎（二）对话操练 Dialogue Acting — ask Ss to say out some sentences using different sentence patterns like May I ask you some questions ?‎ ‎/ Excuse me ,can you tell me the way to ?‎ ‎（三）语法复习 : ―can首‖先表示 ―能 /会做某事 ‖，其次也可以表示 ―可 能 ‖，可与 ―may ‖互换使用，但是美国人多用 ―may ‖，英国人多用 ―can，‖ 在表示否定的可能性时， 常用 ―can‘，t 而‖不用 ― may not表‖示，而 ―may‖ 表示请求许可的用法较为学生所熟悉。‎ 例解：‎ ‎1、 I go out with Lucy on weekends, Mum ?--- No, you .‎ A. May, may not B.Can, may not C.May, mustn ‘tD. Could , may not 此题应选用 C 项。在问句中用 ―Can,Could或 May‖提问均是可以的，‎ 但是从 ― No,you .中‖可以看出是 ―否定回答 ‖，故应该用 ―mustn‘表t ‖ 达，故其余三项均是错误的。‎ ‎2、 It in one of yo ur pockets, but I ‘ m not sure.‎ A. maybe B. may be C. must be D. can ‘ t be 此题应选用 B 项。从 ―butI ‘mnot sure ‖中可以知道是 ―没有把握的事 情 ‖，故不能说 ―一定 ‖，也不能说 ―不可能 . ‖，而 A 项中的 ―maybe‖ 不是动词，故也是错误的。‎ 四、巩固拓展 ‎147‎ 教 后 录 ‎148‎ 课时授课计划 授课日期 年 月 日 星期 ‎ 课 题 （第 课时） 情态动词 must mustn ’t 用法 课时教学 目标 ‎熟练使用情态动词、时间状语从句、条件状语从句等句型。‎ 重点和难 点 ‎1) 情态动词 must 表示 ―应该、必须 ‖之意和 ― mustn ‘表t示‖‎ ‎―不该 /不可以 ‖之意。‎ ‎2)时间状语从句和条件状语从句 难点突破： must 的否定意义与肯定意义的不同含义，状语从句时态的区 别使用 教学媒体 A tape recorder , CAI 时 教 师 活 动 设 计 学生活动 间 复习步骤设计：‎ ‎（一）词汇复习 Revision of the words and phrases learnt in Unit 17 。‎ dictation of the main ones and important sentences. （此 环 节可根据中考词汇表顺序进行听写检查）‎ ‎（二）对话操练 Dialogue Acting —ask Ss to say out some sentences using Must I finish the work today ?/ What will you do if it rains 学 ‎‎ tomorrow ? /They will go for a picnic after the rain stops .etc.（此环节也可以采取学生达标积分制进行 ,‎ 生可自由组合进行）‎ ‎（三）语法复习 ‎1) ― mus首t ‖先表示 ―应该、必须 ‖之意，其次也可以表示 ―不该 /不可 以 ‖之意。‎ 例解：‎ ‎1、 You touch the machine , or it hurt you .‎ A. mustn ‘ t, mayB. may, must C. may not, can D. can, can ‘t 此题应选用 A 项。从 ― touch the machine中可以‖看出是危险的事 情，所以 ―会弄伤人 ‖，前后两句之间具有逻辑关系。故应该用 ‎― mustn 和‘tmay‖表达。‎ ‎2、 Students drink or smoke, no matter at home or at any other places.‎ A. may not B. can ‘tC. mustn ‘tD. needn ‘ t 此题应该选用 C 项，因为学生的行为准则是 ―不得吸烟、喝酒 ‖，而 不是 ―不必 ‖，故应该选用 ―mustn‘表t 达‖。‎ 2) 用 ―when, before, after 持 ‎引‖导的时间状语从句，大多与主句时态保 一致，但如果主句为将来时态 ,则时间状语从句应该用一般现在时 ‎149‎ 态。 例解：‎ ‎3、 You must look left and right you cross the street.‎ A. after B. until C. when D. before 此题应选用 D 项。从 ― you cross the street中可以‖看出带有一定的 危险性，所以 ―必须先看清楚 ‖，而不是在穿过时 /后再开始看清 楚。故应该用 ―before表‖达。‎ ‎4、 After we for three hours, we felt very tired and thirsty.‎ A. walk B. run C. drive D. walked 而成。‎ 此题应选用 D 项。从 ― we felt very tired ‎‎ 中可‖以看出是过去时态 的句子，所以 前面的状语从句也要与之保持一致。故应用 ‎― walked表‖达。‎ ‎3) 用 ― if引‖导的条件状语从句，大多用一般现在时态，即使主句为将 来时态 ,条件从句中带有将来时态的时间信号， 也用现在时态进行表 达。‎ 例解：‎ ‎5、 If the weather fine tomorrow, they for a picnic .‎ A. will be ,will go B. is, will go C. is, won ‘ tDg.oisn ‘ t, will go 此题应选用 B 项。从上下文中可以看出 ―如果明天天气好，他们就要 去野餐 ‖，所以条件从句中虽然带有将来时态的信号 ―tomorrow ，‖ 也 只能用现在时态结构， 故 A 项是显性错误， 而 C 项、D 项不符合逻辑，‎ 故只能选用 ―is, will go 四、巩固拓展 ‎进行‖表达。‎ 教 后 录 ‎150‎ 课时授课计划 授课日期 年 月 日 星期 ‎ 课 题 （第 课时） have to 和 must 的区别、连系动词 look, feel, be 的用法 课时教学 目标 ‎情态动词 have to 和 must 的区别、连系动词 look, feel, be 的用法 must 没有时态变化，而 have to 可以有多种时态变化 重点和难 点 ‎学会用所教语法知识系统进行表达 教学媒体 A tape recorder , CAI 时 教 师 活 动 设 计 学生活动 间 复习步骤设计：‎ ‎（一）词汇复习 Revision of the words and phrases learnt in Unit 18。‎ dictation of the main ones and important sentences. （此环节可根据中考 词汇表顺序进行听写检查）‎ ‎（二）对话操练（ Dialogue Acting — ask Ss to say out some sentences using Do you have to stop eating sweets ?/Did he have to finish all the work yesterday ? /We students must work hard at our lessons, needn ‘ t we ?etc.（此环节也可以采取学生达标积分制进行 ,学生可自由组合进 行）‎ ‎（三）语法复习 ‎1) ― mus表t ‖示说话人的主观看法，没有人称和数的变化， 而 ― have to ‖ 则表示客观的角度看某人需要做的事情， 意思为 ―必须、只得、不得不 ‖， 有各种人称和时态变化。两者后面均加上动词原形。‎ 例解：‎ ‎① She will stay at home to wait for Jim for a long time.‎ A. have to B. has to C. must D. must have to 此题应选用 A 项。从 ―Shewill ‖中可以看出是将来时态的结构，所 以 不能用 ―must‖进行表达 , 而 ―will ‎― have to表达‖。‎ ‎后‖面应该用动词原形，故应该用 ‎② You want to t to play basketball. But you homework first .‎ A. will have to B. must C. must have to D. have to ‎finish your 此题应选用 B 项。从第一句的内容上中可以看出第二句中说话人提出 了条件，即 ―你必须先完成你的作业 ‖故应该从说话人主观的角度看问 题，所以应该用 ―must‖进行表达。‎ ‎2)常用的连系动词有 feel, look, be 等。他们的后面常用名词、形容词 ‎（副词）、介词短语等。 例解：‎ ‎③ The girl feels very today.‎ A. angrily B. happily C. happier D. lucky 此题应选用 D 项。从动词 ― feels 中‖看出需要用形容词， 又从 ‎ ‎―very ‖‎ 中看出须用形容词原级，故应该用 ―lucky ‖进行表达才符合语法和逻 辑。‎ ‎151‎ ‎④ The sick boy is very today.‎ A. fine B. good C. well D. better 此题应选用 C 项。从动词 ― is 中‖看出需要用形容词，又从 ―very ‖‎ 中看出须用形容词原级，故从表象上看应该用 ―fine/good ‖进行表达 ,‎ 但是表示生病的人身体康复不能用 ―fine/good ‖进行表达，而应该用 ‎― well进‖行表达。 四、巩固拓展 教 后 录 ‎152‎ 课时授课计划 授课日期 年 月 日 星期 ‎ 课 题 （第 课时） 不定代词 /副词的用法、动词 bring 和 take 的区别 课时教学 目标 ‎不定代词 /副词的用法、动词 bring 和 take 的区别 重点和难 点 ‎不定代词在各种句式中的变化方式 能运用所学知识点进行灵活运用 教学媒体 A tape recorder , CAI 时 教 师 活 动 设 计 学生活动 间 复习步骤设计：‎ ‎（一）词汇复习 Revision of the words and phrases learnt in Unit 19-20 。‎ dictation of the main ones and important sentences. （此环节可根据中考 词汇表顺序进行听写检查）‎ ‎（二）对话操练（ Dialogue Acting — ask Ss to say out some sentences using Can you hear anything/ anybody ?/ Can you bring me something to eat ?etc.（此环节也可以采取学生达标积分制进行 ,学生可自由组合 进行）‎ ‎（三）语法复习 :‎ ‎1）― something /somebody/somewhere/everywhere 意为 ―某物‖ /某人 /某地 ‎/到处 ‖用于肯定句中， ― anything/anybody/anywhere ‖用于疑问句中，‎ ‎― nothing /nobody/nowhere 例解：‎ ‎用于否‖定句中。‎ ‎①The question is so easy that can answer it easily.‎ A. nobody B. somebody C. anybody D. everybody 此题应选用 D 项。从前面 ―The question is so easy中看‖出 ―所有人都能 轻松回答这个问题 ‖，而此句为肯定句，所以不能用 ―anybody‖，而 应该用 ―everybody 进‖行表达。‎ ‎② can live on the moon because there is no air or water there.‎ A. Everything B.Something C. Nothing D. Anything 此题应选用 C 项。从动词 ― on the moon because there is on air or water there. 中‖看出 ―没有东西可以生长在月球上面 ‖，所以应该选用 ‎― Nothing 进行‖表达。‎ ‎③ There is wrong with my computer. It doesn ‘ t work .‎ A. something B. everything C. nothing D. anything 此题应选用 A 项。从后面 ―It doesn ‘t work中. 看‖出 ―电脑肯定有毛病 了 ‖，所以 ―nothing 是‖逻辑错误， 此句为肯定句， 所以应用 ―something ‖ 进行表达 ,不可能说 ―一切东西坏了 ‖而常说 ―某东西坏了 ‖，故 B 项是错 的。‎ ‎2）bring /take 为 ―带有方向性的动词 ‖， 以说话人的方向为准 ― bring ‖ 表示 ―拿来，带来 ‖，而 ―take则‖表示 ―带走，拿走 ‖。‎ 例解：‎ ‎153‎ ‎④ Don‘ t it away at the moment. I want it here.‎ A. bring B. take C. get D. carry 此题应选用 B 项。从后面 ―Iwant it here . ‖中看出 ―说话人此处需要 它 ‖，所以 ―不要把它拿走 ‖是符合逻辑的， 所以应用 ―Don‘t take it away ‖ 进行表达。‎ ‎⑤ Please find your text book and it to school tomorrow.‎ A. take B. get C. bring D. carry 此题应选用 C 项。从后面 ―it to school tomorrow. 中看‖出 ―说话人叫学 生明天把书本带到学校去 ‖，所以学生往往会选 ―take表‖达，但是英语 中听话者和说话者共去的地方应该用 ―bring表‖达。‎ 四、巩固拓展 中考英语总复习教案集粹十六 语法重点： 1）有连词 but 和 and,so 等连接的并列句 ‎2）反身代词的使用方法 难点突破： 1）表示转折意义，表示并列或顺接关系的区别 2）不同语境中的反身代词用法 知识目标：灵活运用所学知识进行交际的能力 复习步骤设计：‎ ‎（一）词汇复习 Revision of the words and phrases learnt in Unit 21。‎ dictation of the main ones and important sentences. （此环节也可根据中 考词汇表顺序进行听写检查）‎ ‎（二）翻译操练（ Practice—ask Ss to say out some sentences using ―and, but ,so ‖（et此c.环节也可以采取学生达标积分制进行 ,学生可自由发言 进行）‎ ‎（三）语法复习 : 1 ）连词 ―but意‖为 ―但是，然而 ‖，为转折连词， ―and ‖ 为并列连词，在并列句前相等于一个 ―无意义的引导词 ‖，―so意‖为 ―所 以，因此 ‖，具有具体的意义。‎ 例解：‎ ‎① He is very young, he is also very strong and quick.‎ A. but B. and C. when D. so 此题应选用 B 项。从前面 ― He is very young, 中看‖出 ―他很年轻 ‖，而 后面的 ―他也很强壮、聪明 ‖，两者之间应该是并列关系，而不是从属 关系或因果关系，更不是转折关系，故只能选用 ―and连‖接。‎ ‎② It ‘nsot whether (是否 )you win or lose, how you play the game.‎ A. so B. and C. but D. when 此题应选用 C 项。从前面 ―It ‘s not wheth是er否(‎ ‎)you win or lose ‎中‖看出 ‎―你的输赢并不重要 ‖，而 ―你如何进行的过程才是重要的 ‖，可以看出 是前后转折的关系，故只能选用 ―but连‖接。‎ ‎2) 反身代词有称自身代词， 有第一人称和第二人称的物主代词和第三 人称的宾格形式加上词尾的 -self/ -selves 构成。其意义为 ―某人自己 /‎ 某人亲自 /某人独自 ‖等。 例解：‎ ‎③ Xiao Ming fell off the tree and hurt badly yesterday.‎ A. her B. himself C. him D. herself 此题应选用 B 项。从前面 ―Xiao Ming fell off the tree and 中看出‖―小 ‎154‎ 明从树上摔了下来 ‖，而 ―弄伤了他自己 ‖，不可能是弄伤了另一个 ―他‖， 更不可能是 ―她自己 ‖了，故只能选用 ―himself 才‖符合语法和逻辑。‎ ‎④ Help to some fruit,Lucy and Lily.‎ A. herself B. themselves C. yourself D. yourselves 此题应选用 D 项。从后面的 ―Lucy and Lily. 中看‖出是主人在招呼她们 两个 ―随便吃点水果 ‖，而 ―Help yourself/yourselves to sth 为固定‖结构，‎ 不能用其他人称的自身代词， 故只能选用 ―yourselves才‖符合语法和逻 辑。‎ 四、巩固拓展 教 后 录 ‎155‎ 课时授课计划 授课日期 年 月 日 星期 ‎ 课 题 （第 课时）状语从句 掌握时间状语，目的状语，条件状语，结果状语等用法 课时教学 目标 重点和难 点 ‎时间状语，目的状语，条件状语，结果状语从句的时态 教学媒体 A tape recorder , CAI 时 教 师 活 动 设 计 学生活动 间 ‎（一）时间状语从句： 由 when, while, before, after, since, as soon as, till ‎/ until 引导的从句 ‎1）when 与 while when while ‎“短命”动词 ‎“长命”动词 eg.1)I ‘ ll tell her the good news he comes back.‎ 2) Aunt Wang came in while we were watching TV ‎“短命”动词的否定式 ‎2)‎ ‎“长命”动词的肯定式 ‎‎ until until ‎: 直到 才 ‎: 到 为止 2) since:自从 ,, 以来 (since 从句常用一般过去时 )‎ 注意主句通常用现在完成时，但当主句表示一种状态，用一般现在 时 eg.1)He has lived there since he came to China 2)It is two years since her mother died.‎ ‎（二） 条件状语从句：由 if ( 如果 )引导的从句 eg.I will go to the park if it (not rain) tomorrow.‎ 注意：条件状语从句与以下句型的转换 ‎1）祈使句， and (then , or)+ 简单句 ‎= If you , you eg.1)Use your head, then you find a‘wally.‎ ‎=If you use your head, you ‘ ll find a way 2)Hurry up, or you ‘ ll be late.‎ ‎=If you don ‘ t hurry, you ‘ ll be late.‎ ‎156‎ ‎2)without 与条件句的转化 eg. Man can ‘ t live without water.‎ ‎=Man can ‘ t live if there is no water.‎ 注意以上两种状语从句的时态 主句 时间、条件句 ‎1）一般将来时 2）祈 使句 3）情态动词原形 ‎一般现在时 一般过去时 一般过去时 但 since 从句例外，应与现在完成时连用。‎ eg.1)I ‘ ll call you as soon as he (come) back.‎ ‎2)He won ‘ t go to bed until he (finish) his homework. 3)I ‘ ll help you if I (be) free tomorrow ‎4)I (live) here since I came to China.‎ ‎（三）原因状语从句：由 because, since , for , as引导的从句 eg. He didn ‘ t go to school because he was ill.‎ 注意： 1)对 because引导的从句提问用 why ‎2)因为 (because), 所以 (so)不能连用 eg. Because he was (A) ill, so (B) he didn ’t(C) go to school (D) yesterday. ‎ ‎（四）结果状语从句：由 so that 引导的从句（ so 后接形、副原级）‎ eg. He ran (A) so faster (B) that I couldn ‘cat tch up with (C) him .‎ 注意： 1) “ so that +否定句 ”与“ too to”的替换 eg.1)He is so young that he can ‘ t go to school.‎ ‎= He is too young to go to school( 主、从句主语相同 )‎ 2) He ran so fast that we couldn ‘ t catch up with him.‎ ‎= He ran too fast for us to catch up with. (主、从句主语不同 )‎ 3) The box is so heavy that I can ‘ t carry it ‎= The box is too heavy for me to carry.(注意 carry 后省去宾语 it) 2）“ ‎ so that +从句”与“ enough to”的替换 eg.1)He ‘ s so strong that haenccarry the box.‎ ‎= He ‘ s strong enough to carry the box.‎ 2) The question is so easy that I can answer it ‎157‎ ‎=The question is easy enough for me to answer 练 习 ‎( )1.We bought granny a present, she didn ‘ t like it.‎ A. but B. and C. when ‎( )2.Be quick, you ‘ ll be late for the football match.‎ A. so B. and C. or ‎( )3.You ‘ vdeone badly, ‎ B. but C. so ‎I can see you did your best. A. or ‎( )4.That was our first lesson, she didn ‘ t know all our names.‎ A. for B. but C. so ‎( )5.They didn ‘ t pass the ball often enough, they didn ‘ t play together very well.‎ A. and B. yet C. when ‎( )6.It was raining at that time, they couldn ‘ t go out for walk.‎ A. because B. or C. so ‎( )7.Mary couldn ‘ t go to school, she was very ill. A. for B. before C. though ‎( )8.Go straight along the road, you ‘ ll find the hospital at the end of it.‎ A. since B. and C. when ‎( )9.Take this medicine , you will yet well soon. A. and B. but C. so ‎( )10.Either she or I him at the airport.‎ A. is to meet B. am to meet C. are to meet ‎( )11.The train hasn ‘ t arrived .‎ A. too B. also C. yet ‎( )12.You won ‘ t go there, will I.‎ A. So B. Neither C. Also ‎( )13.You can take this book that book, but you can ‘ t take of them.‎ A. either, or ; all B. either , or ; both C. not only , but also ; both ‎( )14.The students had no water food then A. or B. and C. also ‎( )15.They were weak carry the heavy box.‎ A. neither , nor B. both , and C. too , to ‎( )16.The books aren ‘ t yours ours.‎ A. nor B. and C. but ‎( )17.Tom saves his money, John spends all he gets.‎ A. while B. or C. so ‎( )18.Excuse me, can you tell me how to get to the park?‎ A. and B. please C. but ‎( )19.He needs to have a rest, he has worked for a long time .‎ A. and B. but C. for ‎( )20.The policeman was busy holidays with his family.‎ ‎158‎ A. very , to spend B. too , to spend C. so , that ‎( )21.Neither Jack nor I to the park.‎ A. is going B. are going C. am going ‎( )22.His grandfather has never been to school so he could read write.‎ A. neither , nor B. either , or C. both , and ( )23.Johm until Mike sorry to him.‎ A. let him in , said B. didn ‘ t let him in , said C. didn ‘ t let him in , says ‎( )24.I ‘ m sure Li Ping is in the classroom in the library.‎ A. either , or B. both , and C. neither , or ‎( )25.Don ‘ t open the door the bus .‎ A. until , stops B. and , stops C. until , stop ‎( )26.Both his father and his mother to Beijing.‎ A. has been B. have been C. has gone ‎( )27.We ‘ ll have a sports meeting if it rain tomorrow.‎ A. won ‘ tB. isn ‘ t C. don ‘ t D. doesn ‘ t ( )28.I ‘ ll let you know as soon as he .‎ A. comes back B. will come back C. is coming back D. come back ‎( )29.I ‘ m busy getting ready for Christmas I have no time to write to you.‎ A. not, until B. too, to C. so, that D. neither, nor ‎( )30.This TV set is too dear, it gives you a better picture.‎ A. or B. if C. though D. and ‎( )31.Could you ask Tom to ring me up if you him tomorrow.‎ A. met B. meet C. will meet D. have met ‎( )32.While she TV in the sitting room, the bell .‎ A. watches, rings B. is watching, rang C. was watching D. watched, was ringing ‎( )33.Mary will go after she her homework.‎ A. shops, finish B. shopping, finishes C. to shop, finishing D. shopping, finish ‎( )34.He is listening to the music he is washing clothes.‎ A. after B. before C. when D. while ‎( )35.Tell Mr. Wang to go to Mr. Li ‘ s office, when you him.‎ A. saw B. will see C. are seeing D. see ( )36.They until the meeting was over.‎ A. left B. not leave C. don ‘ t leave D. didn ‘ t leave ‎( )37.The children sat at the table until the guests .‎ A. leave B. are leaving C. left D. had left ‎( )38.The film for half an hour when I got to the cinema.‎ A. has begun B. had been on ‎159‎ C. begun D. begins ‎( )39.She until late into the night.‎ A. waited B. came C. went D. started ‎( )40.He began to do his homework he turned on the light.‎ A. before B. since C. till D. after ‎( )41.He didn ‘ t go to swim yesterday he was ill.‎ A. when B. if C. because D. and because ‎( )42.Li Ping gives me more help than Wang Lin .‎ A. is B. has C. does D. gives ‎( )43.Please keep the box for me I come back tonight.‎ A. when B. as C. to D. until ‎( )44.I bought an umbrella the weather was fine.‎ A. if B. although C. because D. as ‎( )45.We got to the cinema late there were no seats left.‎ A. too, to B. much, to C. very, that D. so, that ( )46.It five years I left the army.‎ A. is , since B. was , since C. has been, when D. is , when ‎( )47.Though it was raining hard, was still waiting for her son in the rain.‎ A. but she B. and she C. she D. so she ( )48.I have known him I was a child.‎ A. because B. since C. when D. before ‎( )49.Jim had finished his homework his mother came back.‎ A. after B. before C. while D. then 教 后 录 ‎160‎ 课时授课计划 授课日期 年 月 日 星期 ‎ 课 题 （第 课时） 宾语从句 课时教学 目标 ‎掌握宾语从句的用法，特别是引导语，时态，连接词的运用 重点和难 点 ‎引导语，时态，连接词的运用 、语序的正确 教学媒体 A tape recorder , CAI 时 教 师 活 动 设 计 学生活动 间 宾语从句： 充当宾语的句子 对宾语从句应注意以下三要素： 1. 引导词 2. 语序 3. 时态 ‎1. 引导词 ‎1)that 引导一般疑问句意义的宾从 (that 可省 )‎ eg. He says (that) the boy is a lilltle weak in Chinese.‎ ‎2)疑问词引导 特殊疑问句意义 的宾从 eg. ①. Do you know who will give us a talk?‎ ‎② . I don ‘ t knowwhose book that is.‎ ‎③ . Could you please tell which gate we have to go to?‎ ‎④ . I wonder when he will come back.‎ 注意： 此类宾从的主语与主句的主语 （或宾语） 相同时， 可替换为 “疑 问词 + to do”‎ eg. ①. I haven ‘ t decided wherIewill go ‎=I haven ‘ t decidwedhere to go ‎② . He asked me what I bought ‎= He asked me what to buy .‎ 类似短语： how to do what to say ‎ what to do where to go ‎ 2) if/whether ( 是否 )引导 一般疑问句意义 的宾从 eg. ①. ― Do you like this book? ‖ she asked me.‎ ‎=She asked me I liked this book.‎ ‎② . ― Have you visited the Great Wall? ‖ Could you tell me?‎ ‎161‎ ‎=Could you tell me you have visited the Great Wall?‎ 注意以下几点：‎ ⅰ .区别 if 当作“是否” ，还是“如果”‎ eg. I don ‘ t know if he (come)if it (rain) tomorrow.‎ ⅱ .用 whether 不用 if 的几种情况 ‎1)后接不定式 eg. I can ‘ t decide whether to go to Beijing.‎ ‎2)与 or / or not 连用 eg. I want to know whether you will go to the park or not.‎ ‎3)在句首时 eg. Whether this is true or not, I can ‘ t say.‎ ‎4)whether 还可以引导让步状语从句，意为“不管，无论” eg. Whether it rains or not, we are going to the park tomorrow. 2.语序：宾从用陈述句语序 eg. 1)I don ‘t(A) know whether (B) will he (C) come (D) tomorrow.‎ 2) He asks (A) me when (B) will you (C) come back (D).‎ 3) Could you tell (A) how many players (B) are there (C) in (D) a football team? ‎ ‎3.时态 主句 宾语从句 一般现在时 一切时态 过去范畴的某一时态（一般 一般过去时 ‎过去时；过去进行时；过去 完成时；过去将来时）‎ she goes to ‎school ‎every ‎day.‎ eg.1) She says(that )‎ ‎she has been ill ‎for ‎five ‎days.‎ she will com etom orrow.‎ shewent to school every day.‎ 2) She said ‎(that)‎ ‎shehad been ill ‎for ‎five days. 但当宾语从句是指客观事 shewould com ethe next day.‎ 实、普遍真理、自然现象时，则只能用一般现在时。‎ eg. She said (that) the sun rises in the east.‎ 练 习 ‎162‎ ‎( )1.Alice wanted to know her grandma liked the dog.‎ A. that B. if C. which D. what ( )2.Can you tell us ?‎ A. where have you gone B. where have you gone C. where you have been D. where have you been ‎( )3.Do you still remember ?‎ A. that he said B. what he said C. did he say that D. what did he say ‎( )4.The weather here changes very often and we can ‘ t tell it will be like tomorrow.‎ A. that B. how C. what D. whether ( )5.— What did the scientist say?‎ ‎---He said he wondered if into space by spaceship one day.‎ A. he had to fly B. he could fly C. can he fly D. could he fly ‎( )6.Do you know from Wuhan to Xi ‘ an ?‎ A. how far it is B. how far is it C. how long it is D. how long is it ( )7.Could you tell me ?‎ A. where do you live B. who you are waiting for C. who were you waiting for D. where you live in ‎( )8.— Is the lake there beautiful?‎ ‎-–This photo will show you .‎ A. how does it look like B. what does it look like C. how it looks like D. what it looks like ‎( )9. I don ‘ t know bought the present for me. Is it Jack?‎ A. which B. who C. whose D. what ( )10.Could you show us a bike ?‎ A. how to mend B. what to buy C. where to go D. how many to buy ‎( )11.I don ‘ t know Jane was late for school this morning.‎ A. who B. what C. whom D. why ‎( )12.—Do you remember he came? --Yes, I do. He came by car.‎ A. that B. if C. how D. when ( )13.Mike said he a cold for a few days.‎ A. has caught B. had caught C. has had D. had had ‎( )14.I don ‘ t know if he here. If he , I ‘ ll tell you.‎ A. will come, comes B. comes, will come C. comes , comes D. will come, will come ( )15.Could you tell me best?‎ ‎163‎ A. which one you like B.which one do you like C. do you like which one D.you like which one ‎( )16.The teacher told the children that the earth around the sun.‎ A. moves B. moved C. had moved D. was moving ‎( )17.Nobody knows which factory .‎ A. does he work B. he works C. does he work in D. he works in ‎( )18.He said that no one knew with him.‎ A. what is the matter B. what was the matter C. what the matter is D. what the matter was ‎( )19.I ‘ m interested_i_n or not he is coming.‎ A. whether B. if C. when D. why ‎( )20.I ‘ m sorry that I you were here.‎ A. didn ‘ t know B. don ‘ t know C. won ‘ t know D. can ‘ t know 教 后 录 ‎164‎ 课时授课计划 授课日期 年 月 日 星期 ‎ 课 题 （第 课时） 定语从句：‎ 课时教学 目标 ‎掌握定语从句的用法 重点和难 点 ‎连接词，先行词，以及时态的变化 教学媒体 A tape recorder , CAI 时 教 师 活 动 设 计 学生活动 间 概念：在句中作定语的句子，它修饰一个名词或代词，这个被修饰的 名词、代词叫做先行词。‎ 一、引导词（关系词） ： 位于从句与先行词之间，起连接作用，同时 在从句中充当一定的成分。 先行词分两类： 1.关系代词 who（作主语） ,‎ whom（作宾语） , whose（作定语） , which（作主语、宾语） , that（作 主语、宾语） . 2.关系副词 when, where, why.‎ 注意： 1.如果关系代词在定语从句中作宾语时，引导词可以省略 .‎ eg. The trees (that) we have planted grow well.‎ ‎2.关系代词作宾语时，可放在介词后。 但当关系代词是 that 时，则不能放在介词后。 eg. This is the house in which Lu Xun once lived ‎= This is the house which Lu Xun once lived in.‎ ‎=This is the house that Lu Xun once lived in 二、如何选用引导词： 一般情况引导词的选用是受先行词决定的 —— 先行词是人时用 that , who , whom , whose; 先行词是物时用 that , which; 先行词是时间、地点时用 when , where.‎ eg. 1)The boy who / that is standing under the tree is Jim. 站在树下的 那个男孩时 Jim.‎ 2) Do you know the girl whose mother is a driver ? 你认识那个 妈妈 是司机的 女孩吗？‎ 3) Have you been to the factory where your father work s? 你去过 你 爸爸工作的 工厂吗？‎ 但注意区别 who / that ( 指人 )； which / that ( 指物 ) 1.修饰人只用 who 的情况：‎ a. 先行词是 one , ones , anyone , those 时。‎ b. there be 句型中修饰名词时。‎ c. 先行词后有一个较长的定语。‎ eg.1)Anyone who hasn’htanded in his home- work should stay after school. 没交作业的 任何人放学后都要留下。‎ 2) There is a girl who wants to see you at the school gate. 校门口有位 想见你的 女孩。‎ 3) Did you see the man in the park yesterday afternoon who wore a red shirt? 昨天下午在公园你见过那个 穿红衬衫的 人吗？ 2.修饰人或物只用 that 的情况：‎ a. 先行词为指物的不定代词 all , much , little, few , ‎ everything ,‎ ‎165‎ something , anything , nothing b.先行词前有最高级、序数词及 last , only , very , all , no 时 c. 先行词既有人，又有物时 d. 主句是 who / which 引导的特殊疑问句， 而先行词又指人或物时。‎ eg.1)Is there anything that I can do for you ? 有 让我做的 事吗？‎ 2) He is the only one that can help us at the moment. 他是现在 能帮助 我们的 唯一的人。‎ 3) He talked about the teachers and schools that he had visited . 他谈论 着他 拜访过的 老师和 参观过的 学校。‎ 4) Which is the machine that we used last Sunday ? 我们上周星期天 用过的 机器是哪一台？‎ ‎3.修饰物只用 which 的情况：‎ a. 先行词在定语从句中作介词的宾语时 a. 先行词为 that 时 eg.1)This is the house in which Lu Xun once lived . 这就是 鲁迅以前住 过的 房子。‎ ‎2)What ‘ s thwathich you are holding in your arms ? 你抱着的 那个是 什么？‎ ‎* 三、定语从句可简化为短语 ‎1．定语从句为被动语态时可简化为过去分词短语；定语从句为现在 进行时可简化为现在分词短语。‎ ‎2．定语从句的谓语 (be)后是介词短语，可简化为介词短语作定语。‎ ‎3．定语从句的谓语动词含情态动词，可简化为不定式。 eg.1)I bought a book that was written by Lu Xun.‎ ‎= I bought a book written by Lu Xun.‎ 2) Tell the children who are playing there not to do that.‎ ‎= Tell the children playing there not to do that.‎ 3) The book that is on the table is mine.‎ ‎= The book on the table is mine.‎ 4) We have nothing that we should fear.‎ ‎= We have nothing to fear.‎ 练 习 一、用适当的关系代词填空 ‎1.Is it the very house you lived in ten years ago? 2.The woman sits next to the door is my mother.‎ ‎3.I ‘ ll never forget the year I_joined the League.‎ 4. It is the house I was born.‎ 5. The house roof is broken has been repaired.‎ 二、用短语来改写下面的定语从句部分。‎ 1. The man that is talking with Mary is my brother.‎ ‎ .‎ 2. This is a book which was written by a worker 1. The student who is from Canada speaks French.‎ ‎166‎ ‎ .‎ 1. She has a lot of work that she must do.‎ 三、选择填空 ‎( )1.The man was a friend of mine.‎ A. that you just talked to B. whom you just talked to him C. who you just talked to him D. which you just talked to ‎( )2.This is the best film has been shown this year.‎ A. who B. that C. which D. when ‎( )3.Finally, the thief handed everything he had stolen to the police.‎ A. which B. what C. that D. in where ‎( )4.Mr. Li told us the stones and writers interested him A. what B. who C. that D. which ‎( )5.My father still remembers the day he joined the army.‎ A. when B. which C. to which D. from which ‎( )6.I ‘ ll never forget the summer holidays we spent together.‎ A. when B. in which C. which D. how ‎( )7— Does the teacher know everybody planted the trees?‎ ‎— Yes, he does.‎ A. which B. whose C. where D. who ‎( )8.The letter I received from him yesterday is very important.‎ A. who B. where C. what D. that ‎( )9.I hate people talk much but do little.‎ A. whose B. whom C. which D. who ‎( )10.—Who is the man was talking to our English teacher?‎ ‎— Oh! It ‘ s Mr Baker, our maths teacher.‎ A. he B. that C. whom D. which ‎( )11.I hate the people don ‘ht elp others when they are in trouble.‎ A. who B. which C. they D. where ‎( )12.George Mallory was an English school teacher climbing.‎ A. who B. whom C. he D. which ‎loved ‎( )13.This is the place I have ever visited.‎ A. there B. when C. where D. which ‎( )14.Nobod y knows the reason she didn ‘ t come to the meeting.‎ A. that B. which C. why D. when ( )15.The moon is a world there is no life.‎ A. that B. which C. where D. why ‎( )16.He has forgotten the day he arrived.‎ A. when B. where C. that D. which ‎( )17.He still remembers the days he spent with your family.‎ ‎167‎ A. when B. where C. that D. on which ‎( )18.Mr. White, car had been stolen, came to the policeman.‎ A. who B. that C. whose D. which ‎( )19.He got to the village liberation.‎ A. that B. which C. when D. where ‎his family once lived before ‎( )20.This is the house I want to buy.‎ A. in which B. that C. whose D. where ‎( )21.He didn ‘ t tell me the place he was born.‎ A. that B. which C. when D. where ‎( )22.He lived in a small village, railway station.‎ A. that B. which C. where D. when ‎was a long way from the 教 后 录 ‎168‎ 课时授课计划 授课日期 年 月 日 星期 ‎ 课 题 （第 课时）交际用语 课时教学 目标 ‎熟练运用交际用语，特别是不同语境中语言的灵活运用 重点和难 点 ‎语境的变化、文化的差异 教学媒体 A tape recorder , CAI 时 间 A)选择填空 ‎教 师 活 动 设 计 学生活动 ‎( )1 ― Happy New Year to you, Mary! ‖ ― ‖‎ A. Thanks for your help B. The same to you C. You are so kind ‎( )2. ― Let ‘ s go to the zoo, shall we? ‖ ― ‖‎ A. All right B. You are welcome C. Yes, we shall ‎( )3. ― Will you please come to my birthday party this Saturday? ‖‎ ‎― ‖‎ A. Yes, I do B. No, I don ‘ t C. Yes, I ‘ d love to ‎( )4. ― CouldI have your name, please? ‖― ‖ A. You‘ re polite B. Call me John C. It ‘ s kind of you ‎( )5. ― Excuse me, may I ask you a question? ‖― ‖‎ A. Not at all B. Yes, of course C. You ask ‎( )6. ― How beautifully you write! ‖ ― ‖‎ A. Not at all B. Thank you C. Don ‘ t say so ‎( )7. ― I ‘ mgoing to the south for a few days. ‖― ‖‎ A. Yes, I am B. Have a good time C. I like it ‎( )8. ― Could I speak to the headmaster? ‖ ― A,.pHleoaldse. ‖‎ on for a moment B. Speak loudly C. What ‘ s wrong ‎( )9. ― Would you like to have another cup of tea?‎ A. Yes, I do B. Not at all C. No, thanks ‎― ‖ ‖‎ ‎( )10. ― Do you think I can borrow your eraser? ― ‖ A. Yes, help yourself B. Yes, I think so C. No, I don ‘ t think so ‎( )11. ― I ‘ m afraid I have to leave a little earlier. My mother is ill in bed.‎ ‎― . I hope she will be better soon. ‖‎ A. It ‘ s nothing B. Nothing serious C. I ‘ m sorry to hear that ‎( )12. ― Don‘ t forget to come to our school tomorrow.― ‖ ‖‎ ‎169‎ A. I don ‘ t B. I can ‘ t C. I won ‘t ‎( )13. ― Thankyou for having us. We had a very good time today. ‖‎ ‎― . Bye. ‖‎ A. No, thank you B. It was my pleasure C. You shouldn ‘ t say that ‎( )14. ― Hello! Could I speak to Miss Green? ― ‖‎ A. Speaking B.Who are you C.I ‘ m Miss Green ‎( )15. ― I ‘smorry to trouble you, Miss Gao. ‖ ― ‖ A. It ‘ s very kind of you B. The same to you C. It doesn ‘ t matter ‎( )16. ― Don‘ t throw paper on the ground. ‖‎ ‎― ‖‎ A. I ‘ m sorry B. Thank you C. You ‘ re welcome ‎( )17. ― Happy Birthday to you. ― ‖ ‖‎ A. Thank you B. That ‘ s OK C. Happy Birthday to you, too ‎( )18. ― What‘thse matter with you? ‖ ― ‖ A. No matters B. What matter C. Nothing serious ‎( )19. ― Shall I close the window? ‖ ― ‖‎ A. No, please don ‘ tB. Not at all C. Don ‘ t dohatt now ‎( )20. ― What‘ s the weather like today? ‖ ― _A_._I_t w‖ill be fine B. It ‘ s rather colCd. It ‘ s nine for a walk ‎( )21. ― You have done a good job. ‖ ― ‖‎ A. No, I don ‘ t do well enough B. You are welcome C. It ‘ s very kind of you ‎( )22. ― I ‘ m sorry, could you repeat it? ‖‎ welcome B. Certainly C. That ‘ s nothing ‎A―. Y e_s_, y‖ou are ‎( )23. ― How is your father?‎ A. I ‘ m fine B. He is good C. He ‘ s feeling bad ‎― ‖ ‖‎ ‎( )24.未听清别人的话， 要求对方重复时说 . A. I ‘ m happy B. I ‘ m sorry C. Pardon ‎( )25. ― Nice weather today, isn ‘ t it? ‖ ― ‖‎ A. Beautiful, isn B‘. Nt oit, it isn ‘ t C. I think it ‘ s too sunny ‎( )26. ― What did you do last night? Why did you not go to see the film? ‖‎ ‎― . The film is really worth seeing. ‖‎ A. I ‘ m sorry to hreitaB. What a pity C. I ‘ m sorry about it ‎( )27.When you see on the way to a forest, you should drive carefully.‎ ‎170‎ A. DANGER B. STOP C. CLOSED ‎( )28.When you see a picture with in an art museum, you mustn ‘ t photo it.‎ A. NO PARKING B. NO PHOTOS C. NO SMOKING ‎( )29. ― Would you like some tea? ‖ ― ‖‎ A. Thank you for asking me B. If you please C. Thanks, that would fine ‎( )30. ― How is it today? ― ‖ ‖‎ A. It ‘ s raiBn. It ‘ s too much raiCn. It ‘ s fine ( )31. ― What day is it today? ― ‖_ ‖‎ A. It ‘ s sunny B. It ‘ s Sunday C. It ‘ s May 12th B）补全对话，每空一词 A: What can I do you?‎ B: I ‘ d like a of shoes. A: What size do you wear?‎ B: Twenty four cm.‎ A: What do you like? B: I like brown very much.‎ ‎( A )‎ A: What the one on the right?‎ B: It very nice. May I them ? A: Of course. Here you .‎ B: They fit me quite well. How are they? A: One hundred and twenty yuan.‎ B: All right. I ‘ ll this pair.‎ ‎( B )‎ A: Sorry, I don ‘ t know. You ‘ d better theopvoelrictehmeraen. B: Thank you all the same.‎ A: Excuse me. is the way to the People ‘ s Hospital.‎ C: Go down this street, turn right and walk on you reach the first ‎ . Then turn right and you ‘ ll see that hospital in of you. A : How far is it here.‎ B: It ‘ s about 2 kilometres.‎ A: My son is badly ill. He can ‘ t walk any longer. can we get there:?‎ B: You can go there bus. Oh, sorry. It ‘ s very late and there is no bus now. You ‘ d better a taxi.‎ A: I see, Thank you very much. B: You are welcome.‎ ‎( C )‎ A: Good morning! I help you?‎ B: I ‘ d like a sweater my daughter.‎ A: Certainly. The woolen sweaters are hanging ‎ ‎ are hanging there. would you like?‎ B: I ‘ ll have a at the woolen oneTsh. ank you. A: No hurry! Please take your time.‎ ‎‎ and the cotton ‎171‎ B: I can ‘ t decide which sweater to ! A: Let me help! Do you like this one?‎ B: No, this one is too large. A: What about this one?‎ B: No, I like the colour. A: What do you want?‎ B: Green. Look! That one , over there.‎ A: Yes, it ‘ s green. What do you want? B: A middle-sized one.‎ A: OK Here you are.‎ A: Hello, 88890921.‎ ‎( D )‎ B: Hello! Could I to Ann, please?‎ A: I ‘ m not. She isn ‘htere at the moment. Can you a message?‎ B: OK. This is Bill here. Is Mrs Green? A: Yes, this is Ann ‘ s mother.‎ B: Thank you very much asking me to Ann‘ sbirthday party on Sunday. I ‘ m very sorry_, I can ‘ t come. A: Oh, I ‘ m sorry to that.‎ B: We are to be in Shanghai that day. I hope you will have a good ‎ .‎ A: Thank you. I ‘ ll give her the . B: Thank you. Bye-bye.‎ 教 后 录 课时授课计划 授课日期 年 月 日 星期 ‎ ‎172‎ 课 题 （第 课时） 现在完成时和过去完成时 能运正确使用现在完成时和过去完成时 课时教学 目标 重点和难 点 ‎能正确判断时间状语，灵活运用。不规则过去分词的识记。‎ 教学媒体 A tape recorder , CAI 时 教 师 活 动 设 计 学生活动 间 现在完成时难点：‎ ‎① 由 since 引导的时间状语，它们的主句通常使用完成时态。‎ He has taught English since 1970.‎ It has been a long time since I last saw you.‎ ‎② 只有在 It is ,since, 这种结构中，主句的谓语才可用一般 现在时，现在完成时或一般过去时。如：‎ It ’s ten y ears since I left school. It ’s a long time since I saw you last.‎ ‎③ 表示短暂性的动词不能与表示一段时间的状语连用， 这类动词 有：‎ begin, borrow, buy, close, come, die, fall, find, finish,‎ join, kill, lend, leave, sell, start, stop 等，‎ 如：‎ 不能说： His father has died for three years. 只能说： His father died three years ago. 不能说： He has left home for two months. 只能说： He left home two months ago.‎ ‎④ 非延续性动词的否定形式可以表示状态的延续。可与 for, since 时间状语连用。如：‎ I haven ’t seen him for a long time.‎ ‎173‎ I haven ’t heard from him since he left. She hasn’t left home ever since she lost her job.‎ ‎⑤ have(has) been 和 have (has) gone 的区别。‎ Have been to a place 意思是“到过、去过” ，表示曾到过某处， 但现在人不在那儿； have gone to 意思是“去了” ，表示已经去了 某地，现在人可能在去的途中或已在那儿。如：‎ Has she ever been to Nanjing ?‎ You have never been there before, have you? I have been to Guilin, I went there last year.‎ 总之， have been to 讲的是过去的情况，强调去过或没有，着重 于到目前为止的一个结果，而 have gone to 指现在人在不在，只 用于第三人称，不用于第一、第二人称，不能用来代替 have been to.‎ ‎2、过去完成时 ‎（ 1）过去完成时表示在过去某一时间之前已经发生的动作或存在 的状态。其结构是： had + 动词过去分词。否定、疑问句同现在 完成时一样。‎ ‎（ 2）用法 ‎① 表示在过去某一时间或动作之前已经发生或完成的动作，即 “过去的过去” 。如：‎ The meeting had begun when we got there. He said he had seen the film.‎ ‎② 表示某一动作在过去某一时间已经开始， 一直延续到过去的另 一时间，常与 for 或 since 引导的时间状语连用。如：‎ The film had been on for tem minutes when we got there.‎ She said that she had mademuchprogress since she came here.‎ ‎174‎ 教 后 录 ‎175‎ 课时授课计划 授课日期 年 月 日 星期 ‎ 课 题 （第 课时） 被 动 语 态 课时教学 目标 ‎熟悉 8 大时态的被动语态的变化 重点和难 点 ‎无被动语态的识记 教学媒体 A tape recorder , CAI 时 教 师 活 动 设 计 学生活动 间 英语的语态分主动语态和被动语态两种。主动语态的主语是动作 的执行者；被动语态的主语是动作的承受者。‎ eg. We use a knife for cutting ( 主动句 ).‎ A knife is used for cutting ( 被动句 )。 一、构成： be + 过去分词 eg. 1)The work is finished by him.‎ ‎2)Chinese is spoken by people in China.‎ 二、被动语态的时态 ‎1.一般现在时 ： am/ is/ are + 过去分词 eg. English is spoken by Englishmen. 2.一般过去时 ： was/ were + 过去分词 eg. The machines were made in China.‎ ‎3.一般将来时 :will/shall/be going to be+ 过去分词 eg. A sports meeting will be held in our school next week. 4.现在完成时 ： have/ has been + 过去分词 eg. The work has been done by them. 5.现在进行时 ： am/ is/ are being + 过去分词 。‎ eg. A new school is being built in our village. 6.过去进行时 ： was/ were being + 过去分词 eg. My TV set was being mended at that time.‎ ‎2、五种时态的被动语态举例 ‎① 一般现在时 A lot of books are kept in our school library. Radio is used in everyday life.‎ ‎② 一般过去时 A thief was caught last night.‎ They were asked to speak at the meeting.‎ ‎③ 现在进行时 A new library is being put up in their school now. The watch is being repaired.‎ ‎④ 一般将来时 The class meeting will be held next Saturday afternoon.‎ ‎176‎ The thieves will be arrested.‎ ‎⑤ 现在完成时 My bag has been stolen.‎ Many stamps have been collected by me since last year. 3、主动语态变被动语态 ‎① 主动结构的宾语变为被动结构的主语。‎ ‎② 主动结构的谓语动词由主动语态变为被动语态。‎ ‎③ 主动结构的主语变为介词 by 的宾语，组成介词短语，放在被动结 构中谓语动词之后。 在动作的执行者无须说明或不必强调时， by 短语 可以省略。‎ ‎④ 主动语态、被动语态两种时态要保持一致。如：‎ We repaired the motor.‎ The motor was repaired by us.‎ 综上所述： 被动语态的时态只涉及 be 动词的变化（即： be 动词的各 种时态）‎ 另外注意以下几点：‎ ‎1.含情态动词的被动语态：‎ can / may / must / should + be + 过去分词 eg. He may be sent away from school. 2.带动词不定式的被动语态 eg. My bike needs to be mended. 3.在使用被动语态时，如需要指出动作执行者时，应用“ by + 动作的 执行者 (宾格 )”‎ eg. He was called Mike by us ‎4.不及物动词无被动语态（ take place/ happen ; last ; rise ; sink ; fall 等）‎ eg. The accident was happened two days ago ( 改 错 )‎ ‎5.当宾语补足语是省 to 不定式时，在改作被动语态之后，应将省去的 to 还原。‎ eg.The boss made the workers work 12 hours.‎ ‎→ The workers were made to work 12 hours. 6.注意短语动词的完整性（即：主动句的谓语动词若由 v + prep / adv 构成，变被动语态时，不能将这些介词、副词遗漏。‎ eg. We must take care of the baby.‎ ‎→ The baby must be taken care of.‎ 练 习 题 ‎( )1.This factory has been for two years A. open B. to open C. opening D. opened ‎( )2.The light in the room before you leave. A. must turn off B. will turn off C. are turned off D. must be turned off ‎( )3.The young trees planted in spring.‎ A. must B. have C. must be D. must are ‎( )4.Chinese by Miss Wang three years ago. A. was taught ‎177‎ A. is taught B. was teached D. were teach ( )5.Young trees quite often.‎ A. should water B. should be water C. should be watered D. should have watered ( )6.English by many people in the world A. speaks B. speak C. are spoken D. is spoken ( )7.The old people well in our country.‎ A. is looked after B. are looked after C. looks after D. look for ‎( )8. Alice is ill. She to hospital at once.‎ A. is sent B. must be sent C. can send D. must send ( )9. The factory in 1958.‎ A. was built B. is built C. will be built D. built ‎( )10.Our teacher told us that the classroom every day.‎ A. should be cleaned B. should cleaned C. shall be cleaned D. must cleaned ( )11.Football all over the world.‎ A. plays B. is playing C. has played D. is played ( )12. silk in Suzhou?‎ A. Is , produced B. Are, produced C. Does, produce D. Was, produce ‎( )13.Much money spent on books every year. A. have B. has C. are D. is ‎( )14.The students was made the questions by the teacher.‎ A. answer B. to answer C. answering D. answered ‎( )15.The sun when we got there.‎ A. was risen B. has been risen C. had risen D. is rising ‎( )16.The People ‘ s Liberation Army w a_s_ August 1, 1927.‎ A. found in B. found on C. founded on D. founded in ‎( )17.The oranges should be well during the winter.‎ A. keep B. kept C. keeping D. to keep ‎( )18. Many of the sheep by the wolf 狼).‎ A. was killed B. are killed C. are killing D. were killed ‎( )19.Tape recorders in our English class A. should use B. used C. can be used D. are using ‎( )20. English in Canada?‎ A. Do, spoken B. Is , spoken ‎178‎ C. Are, spoken D. Does, speak ‎( )21.He not to leave waster paper everywhere.‎ A. tells B. told C. was told D. has told ‎( )22.Who ― The Family ‖ , ― Spring ‖ and ― Autumn ‖ ?‎ A. was, written B. were, written C. were, written by D. are. Written by ( )23.Look at the building! It now.‎ A. is being built B. has been built C. is building D. has built ‎( )24.Half of the work before six.‎ A. can be done B. will do C. were done ( )25.We stamps for sending letters.‎ A. are used B. use C. used ‎( )26.The Great Green Wall( 绿色长城 ) in North China.‎ A. are built B. can be build C. was built ( )27. the farm by the students ?‎ A. was, visited B. Is, visit C. Must, visit ‎( )28.The woman by people in the waiting room.‎ A. was laughed B. was laughed at C. laughed at ‎( )29. What there?‎ A. happened B. is happened C. must be happened ‎( )30.He was made for twelve hours.‎ A. to work B. work C. worked 教 后 录 ‎179‎ 课时授课计划 授课日期 年 月 日 星期 ‎ 课 题 （第 课时）动词时态的一致 课时教学 目标 ‎时态的一致 重点和难 点 ‎主谓一致 教学媒体 A tape recorder , CAI 时 教 师 活 动 设 计 学生活动 间 教学重点 时态的一致主要是指在主从复合句中， 主句与从句之间的时 态一致通常主句的时态决定从句的时态。原则是：当主句是现在 时与将来时， 从句的谓语根据具体情况可以使用任何时态。 但是， 当主句谓语使用过去时，从句必须使用过去时态。如下表：‎ 主 句 从句谓语 含 义 谓 语 现在进行时；一般现 在时 一 一 般 将 来 时 ；‎ 般 will,can,may+ 动词 现 在 一般过去时 时 现在完成时 ‎‎ 主、从句的动作同时发生 表示从句的动作在主句 的动作之后发生 表示从句的动作在主句 的动作之前发生 表示从句的动作在主句 的动作之前发生 一 过去进行时；一般过 般 去时 ‎表示主、从句的动作同时 发生 ‎180‎ 过 would ，could ， might 去 + 动词 时 过去完成时 ‎表示从句的动作在主句 之后发生 表示从句的动作在主句 动作之前发生 教学难点 1、宾语从句和间接引语与主句的时态一致，符合上述原则。但如 果宾语从句表示客观事实和真理，即使主句谓语用过去时，从句 的谓语也应该使用一般现在时：如：‎ Our teacher told us a little knowledge is dangerous 我们老师告诉我们一知半解是危险的。‎ He said that light travels faster than sound.‎ 他说光传播速度比声音快。‎ ‎2、有些形容词后可以跟从句， 这种从句常看成宾语从句， 它的主、 从句时态也符合上述原则。这些形容词有： afraid, glad, sure,‎ sorry, certain, aware, confident, delighted, lucky, surprised, worried 。如：‎ I ’m sure that he will succeed.‎ ‎3、主语从句、 表语从句、 同位语从句也要与主句的时态一致。 如：‎ That is why he was late for school.‎ 例题：‎ ‎1. Miss Gao isn ‎’t here. She to the station to meet Mr Brown.‎ A. went D. would go B. has gone C. has been 2. ‎ a letter from him since he left.‎ ‎181‎ A. haven ’t got B. didn ’t receive C. didn ’t have D. haven ’t feel 3. When I came in, they games in the room.‎ A. were playing B. are playing C. played D. plays 4. Hurry up! The play for ten minutes.‎ A. has begun B. had begun C. has been on D. began 教 后 录 ‎182‎ 课时授课计划 授课日期 年 月 日 星期 ‎ 课 题 （第 课时） 非谓语动词（一）‎ 课时教学 目标 ‎动词不定式的灵活运用 重点和难 点 ‎动词不定式的不同用法及固定用法 教学媒体 A tape recorder , CAI 时 教 师 活 动 设 计 学生活动 间 在英语中，不充当句子谓语的动词，叫作非谓语动词。由于非谓语动 词不受主语的限制，没有时态和语态，所以又叫非限定动词。非限定 动词有三种形式：动词不定式；动名词和分词。‎ ‎1、动词不定式 ‎（ 1）动词不定式的构成和性质 动词不定式是一种非谓语动词，所谓非谓语动词就是不能作谓语的动 词。正因为如此，它不受主语的人称和数的限制，没有人称和数的变 化，但它具有动词的某些特征，可以带宾语和状语构成不定式短语。 其构成是：“to + 动词原形”，否定式是“ not to + 动词原形”。 to 是不 定式符号，无词义。‎ ‎（ 2）动词不定式的用法 动词不定式除了不能作谓语外，可以作主语、表语、宾语、宾语补足 语、定语和状语。‎ ‎① 作主语 To learn English well is not easy. To drive fast is quite dangerous.‎ 不定式作主语时常常用 it 作形式主语，不定式放在谓语之后以上两个 例句可以写成：‎ It is not easy to learn English well. It is quite dangerous to drive fast.‎ 这种用法可以归纳成这样一个句型：‎ It is (not) + 形容词 + (for sb.) to do sth. It is very expensive for me to buy a car.‎ It is very difficult for a child to do that job.‎ 有些形容词之后跟 of + 名词（代词宾语） +不定式。如： It is very kind of you to say so.‎ It is very good of you to come.‎ ‎② 作表语。如：‎ My job is to teach English.‎ The first thing is to ring him up.‎ ‎③ 作宾语。如：‎ She wanted to ask you a question. He forgot to turn ‎ off the light.‎ We decided to hold a class meeting.‎ ‎183‎ 常见的可以用不定式作宾语的动词有： like, love, begin, start, try, ask, prefer, hate, find 等，有些形容词可接不定式， 这种不定式也可作宾语。 如：‎ I ‘ m very glad to see you He‘ s sure to come.‎ ‎④ 作宾语补足语 不定式是用来补充说明宾语的，通常不定式的动作是宾语发出的。可 以带不定式作宾补的动词有： ask sb. To do sth. want sb. To do sth.‎ tell sb. To do sth. like sb. To do sth. help sb. (to) do sth. ，还有些 动词可以跟省略 to 的不定式作宾语补足语。如： hear, watch, see, feel,‎ make, let, have 等。如：‎ I often help my mother do housework. The policeman asked the driver to stop. The teacher asked us not to talk in class I want you to buy some bananas for me. We saw him play football.‎ We felt the house shake.‎ ‎⑤ 作定语：常常放在所修饰的名词、代词之后，如：‎ I have a lot of of work to do. He wants something to drink.‎ ‎⑥ 作状语。如：‎ He went to the station to meet his friend. （表目的）‎ She has gone to the market to buy some vegetables.（表目的） I ‘ m so glad to hear that you have passed the exa（m.表原因） The boy is too young to go to school. （表结果）‎ ‎（ 3）疑问词加动词不定式 疑问代词 when, who, which 和疑问副词 when, where, why, how 等加动 词不定式，在句中可作主语、宾语、表语等成分。如：‎ I ‘ m don ‘ t know how to use the comepru.（t 作宾语）‎ We can ‘ t decide which one to bu（y.作宾语） The question is how to get there. （作表语） When to start has not been decided.（作主语）‎ 教 后 录 ‎184‎ 课时授课计划 授课日期 年 月 日 星期 ‎ 课 题 （第 课时） 非谓语动词（二）‎ 课时教学 目标 ‎动名词，动词不定式的运用 重点和难 点 ‎牢记一些固定用法 教学媒体 A tape recorder , CAI 时 教 师 活 动 设 计 学生活动 间 动名词 动名词具有名词的特性，它在句子里主要起到主语、宾语和介词宾语 的作用。‎ ‎（ 1）动名词作主语 一般情况下表示一种抽象、 泛指的动作， 而不是一次性的具体的动作。 动名词作主语时，常采用形式主语 it 。‎ Swimming in this river is dangerous. It is dangerous swimming in this river.‎ ‎（ 2）动名词作宾语 英语中有些动词只能接动名词作宾语，不能接不定式，这些动词有：‎ admit（承认） consider（考虑）‎ avoid （避开）‎ deny（否认）‎ can ‘ t h（elp禁不住） enjoy（喜欢）‎ excuse（原谅）‎ finish （完成）‎ mind （介意）‎ practise（练习） miss（错过） suggest（建议）‎ I can ‘ t help laughing.‎ I enjoyed reading this novel.‎ 教学难点 动名词与不定式作直接宾语的比较 ‎① remember doing sth. 表示“记午过去做过的一件事” 。‎ remember to do sth. 表示“记得要去做某事” 。‎ I remember seeing the man before.‎ ‎② forget doing sth. 表示“忘记曾做过某事” 。‎ forget to do sth. 表示“忘记去做某事” 。如 I forgot to turn off the lights when I left the room ‎③ regret doing sth. 表示“对过去做过的一件事情后悔” 。‎ regret to do sth. 表示“对还没做， 或正在做的事情感到后悔、 抱歉”。 如：‎ I regret telling you the bad news.‎ I regret to say I ‘ m unable to help you.‎ ‎④ stop doing sth. 表示“停止正在做的事情” 。‎ stop to do sth. 表示“停下来，去做另一件事情” 。如：‎ We stopped to see what ‎ happened. Let ‘ s stop talking about it.‎ ‎185‎ ‎⑤ try doing sth. 表示“尝试着做某事” 。‎ try to do sth. 表示“设法做某事” 。如：‎ I ‘ ll try doing it in a new way. I once tried to learn Japanese.‎ ‎⑥ mean doing sth 表示“意味着，意思是”‎ mean to do sth. 表示“打算，想要做某事” 。如：‎ Giving up the job means missing a good opportunity.‎ 放弃这份工作意味着错过了一个好机会。‎ I mean to help him with it.‎ ‎⑦ prefer to do sth rather than do sth prefer doing sth. to doing sth. 表示“喜欢做这件事而不喜欢做那件 事”。如：‎ I prefer working to staying at home. This pair of shoes needs repairing.‎ The walls of the room want whitewashing.‎ 教 后 录 ‎186‎ 课时授课计划 授课日期 年 月 日 星期 ‎ 课 题 （第 课时） 九年级模拟考试英语试卷分析（例）‎ ‎1， 审题能力的提高 课时教学 目标 重点和难 点 ‎2， 知识点的清理 ‎3， 失分情况分析 失分情况分析 教学媒体 A tape recorder , CAI 时 教 师 活 动 设 计 学生活动 间 一、考试情况统计 ‎1、全卷总分 120 分，全班 43 名学生，最高分 104 分，最低级分 75‎ 分，分差达到 29 分。‎ ‎2、从全卷五个大题情况看，知识运用、写作技能和附加部分的补全 对话内容明显比其它题型完成得好，补全对话有 18 名同学得了满分，‎ 写作技能部分有 13 名同学得分在 18 分以上。‎ ‎3、失分较多的是听力题，完型填空题及情景作文。听力题没有一个 同学得满分，情景作文题完成得不好，有的同学写了很多，但得分为 ‎0。 二、失分情况分析 ‎1、听力技能。 由于学生从进入初中以来，听力训练方面练习不多，量不够，加之部 分学生单词都还不能记住、会读。导致部分学生听力部分解题能力很 差，也缺乏解题技巧。如第 6— 7 小题部分，从第 7 小题内容就可以 推断出第 6 小题答案，但做错的同学中都没有注意到这一点。还有听 短文部分，从第 20 小题中就可以找到第 16 小题的答案，但大部分同 学只注重于听，而没有认真去看，导致第 16 小题都做错了。‎ ‎2、知识运用。‎ 单项填空部分，第 21、 22 小题学生做错的比较多，平时对知识运用 的细节部分注意得不够。 29 小题有的学生选 A ，说明对含有 or 的宾 语从句的解题方法了解不足， 正确答案应选 B。还有 38 小题， 做错的 学生都是对 stop to do something 和 stop doing something 的用法混淆不 清，概念模糊，导致失分。‎ 完形填空部分，共 10 小题， 41、 47 小题错误较多，由于部分单词学 生不熟悉，导致没有读懂此文，在解此题时，考生不仅要运用所掌握 的词法、句法和语法知识，还要有较强的语篇意识，能在了解全文意 思的基础上做好每一个小题。‎ ‎3、阅读技巧。‎ 共有三部分， 15 个小题。 A 部分学生完成情况比较好， 短文内容容易， 没有生词。 B 部分完成情况不理想， 全校只有 24 位同学全部做对， 甚 至还有得 0 分的学生，说明综合概括能力、推理判断能力和句子理解 能力有欠缺。 C 部分由于内容简单，能从表格中找到答案，所以完成 得比较好， 只有 62 小题由于学生对 actor 和 actress 的意思不清楚， 有 ‎187‎ 部分学生做错了，但采用排除法应能找到正确答案。‎ ‎4、写作技能 句型转换完成情况较好，只有 70 小题，有的学生只记住了肯定形式 so am(do) I 的句式，而对否定形式 neither is he 了解不够， 导致失分。 汉译英部分 72 小题有很多学生做错， 有回答 over thirty; more thirty 的， 说明学生平时对书本上的句子熟记程度不够，另外 75 小题也有部分 学生做错，说明对词组的记忆和运用还欠缺。‎ ‎5、附加部分 补全对话是完成得比较好的一道题，由于对话内容为书本上学习过的 对话，学生平时也练习过，所心对填空内容能快速、正确回答出来， 这道题是学生解答最轻松、自信的一道题。 情景作文是完成得最差的一道题，最高得分只有 7 分，学生对根据所 给图片，加上自己想象写短文把握不足，大部分学生不能组织好自己 的语言，没有注意时态、习惯表达法和语句的连惯等方面的情况。 三、今后教学中应注意的问题 ‎1、加强听力训练，保证听力质量。 在听力过程中注意听力理解的全体性，还要在听力技巧方面给予学生 指导。平时加强学生对单词的听写，注意句型和课文的背诵。‎ ‎2、注意阅读教学，培养学生的阅读分析能力。 在复习过程中，加强阅读理解的教学和复习，实实在在地培养学生的 思维能力。在阅读教学中，做到课内阅读方法和技巧点拨与课外阅读 实践相结合，阅读质量与数量兼顾，理解正确与阅读速度兼顾。 3、加强作文训练，提高写作能力。 加强学生的写作训练，提高综合运用语言能力。教会学生审题，什么 类型的作文用什么格式、时态和人称，要求学生操练各种写作类型， 对学生的作文进行认真批改。‎ ‎4、查漏补缺，重点突破 通过这次模拟考试可以发现学生在有的知识方面还存在一定的问题， 在以后的复习过程中要针对这些问题，予以重点的讲解，在最后的复 习过程中，将注意于薄弱环节的攻克，对学生的薄弱知识点进行重点 突破，针对今年中考英语题目的变化，对学生进行有针对性的练习， 力争有所突破。‎ 教 后 录 ‎188‎